Es-419_gl_es-419_tn/tn_EST.tsv

1	Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
2	front:intro	d989				0	# Introducción a Ester\n\n## Parte 1: Introducción General \n\n### Esquema de Ester\n\n1. El rey Asuero expulsa a su esposa, la reina\n (1:1–22)\n2. Asuero escoge a Ester como la nueva reina\n (2:1–23)\n3. Amán conspira para destruir a los judios\n (3:1–15)\n4. Mardoqueo le pregunta a Ester para ayudar a su gente (4:1–17)\n5. Ester suplica con el rey por los judios (5:1–7:10)\n6. El resultado de la conspiración de Amán para destruir a los judios (8:1–9:16)\n7. El festín de Purim (9:17–32)\n8. Conclusión (10:1–3)\n\n### ¿Dé que trata el libro de Ester?\n\nEl Libro de Ester cuenta cómo una joven judía llamada Ester se convirtió en reina de Persia. Como reina, trabajó para salvar a todos los judíos del Imperio persa de la destrucción.\n\nEste libro termina contando por qué los judíos celebran la fiesta de Purim. El nombre «Purim» viene de la palabra «pur», que significa «suertes» o «dados». Amán, el enemigo de los judíos, lanzaba dados para elegir cuándo atacar y destruir a los judíos. Los judíos celebran Purim para recordar cómo Yahvé rescató a su pueblo de ser destruido.\n\n### ¿Cómo debería traducirse el título de este libro?\n\n Los traductores pueden utilizar el título tradicional de este libro, que es «El libro de Ester» o simplemente «Ester». O pueden elegir un título más claro, como «El libro sobre Ester».\n\n## Parte 2: Conceptos religiosos y culturales importantes\n\n### ¿Qué era el Imperio Persa?\n\nEl rey Ciro el Grande conquistó y gobernó muchos reinos. Fue en la parte del mundo llamada Persia, lo que hoy es Irán. Por eso la gente llamó a su reino el Imperio Persa. Cuando Ciro conquistó Babilonia en el año 539 a.C., controló a los judíos que los babilonios habían llevado al exilio.\n\n### ¿Por qué había judíos en Babilonia cuando los persas la conquistaron?\n\n En 586 a.C., los babilonios conquistaron y llevaron al exilio al pueblo de Judá. Estos judíos y sus descendientes seguían en Babilonia cuando los persas la conquistaron.\n\n### ¿Qué se entendía por «las leyes de los medos y los persas»?\n\nLa frase «las leyes de los medos y los persas» se encuentra en Ester 1:19 y Daniel 6:12. Se refería a leyes y decretos que no podían cambiarse ni suprimirse una vez promulgados. Se refería a leyes y decretos que no podían ser cambiados o eliminados una vez emitidos. En el libro de Ester, el rey decretó que el pueblo podía atacar a los judíos. Más tarde se arrepintió de esa decisión, pero no pudo cambiar el decreto.\n\nEl término «medos» se refiere a un pueblo que había formado su propia nación, pero los persas los conquistaron.\n\n## Parte 3: Aspectos importantes de la traducción\n\n### ¿Qué diferentes niveles de lenguaje hay en el Libro de Ester?\n\n En el Libro de Ester, la gente habla entre sí en muchas situaciones diferentes. Está la conversación cortés y señorial en la corte persa y las palabras de los decretos reales. Los amigos y parientes cercanos también hablan entre sí. Incluso están las palabras que uno utiliza para hablarse a sí mismo. Los traductores deben utilizar todas las formas que su propia lengua tiene de expresar estas diferentes situaciones de un modo que sus lectores identifiquen y comprendan.
3	1:intro	v1fp				0	# Ester 1 Notas Generales\n\n## Conceptos religiosos y culturales en este capítulo\n\n### El divorcio del rey\n\n Los consejeros del rey temían que los maridos perdieran su autoridad al enterarse de que la reina se había negado a venir a mostrar su belleza a los invitados del rey, así que los consejeros le dijeron que se divorciara de ella.\n\n
4	1:1	jdr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֖י	1	En el Antiguo Testamento, esta es una forma habitual de comenzar un relato histórico. Muchos idiomas tienen fórmulas similares, y si el suyo tiene una, puede utilizarla. Pero no la utilices si sugiere que la historia no es real, sino inventada. Traducción alternativa: “este relato sucedió”\n
5	1:1	zzz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בִּ⁠ימֵ֣י אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ	1	El término **día** se utiliza aquí para referirse a un período de tiempo más largo. Se podría decir simplemente «durante el reinado de Asuero», como hace UST. Pero como alternativa, se podría decir “en tiempos de Asuero”\n\n
6	1:1	qwe1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ	1	Es el nombre de un hombre. Aparece muchas veces en la historia. Asegúrate de traducirlo con coherencia.\n\n
7	1:1	v5ts		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ה֣וּא אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ הַ⁠מֹּלֵךְ֙ מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֔וּשׁ שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה	1	Se trata de información de fondo para ayudar al lector a identificar a Asuero.\n
8	1:1	qwe3			ה֣וּא אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ הַ⁠מֹּלֵךְ֙	1	Traducción alternativa: “Este rey llamado Asuero gobernó”\n
9	1:1	qwe5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֔וּשׁ	1	En caso de que su público no sepa dónde están estos lugares, podría decir: “se extienden desde la India en el este hasta Etiopía en el Oeste”.\n
10	1:1	qwe7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה	1	El número se da para mostrar lo grande que era el imperio. Se podría decir explícitamente diciendo: “Asuero gobernaba un imperio muy grande que tenía 127 provincias”.\n
11	1:1	qwe8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה	1	Traducción alternativa: “ciento veintisiete provincias”\n
12	1:2	dk31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כְּ⁠שֶׁ֣בֶת & עַ֚ל כִּסֵּ֣א מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ	1	Aquí, la acción de **sentarse** en un trono se utiliza para referirse a gobernar un reino. Se podría decir simplemente “gobernó”, como hace UST. Pero como alternativa, se podría decir “gobernó su imperio desde su trono real”.\n
13	1:2	qwe9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	עַ֚ל כִּסֵּ֣א מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ	1	**Realeza** es un sustantivo abstracto que se refiere a la autoridad real que ejercía el rey. Puedes traducir esta idea con un verbo diciendo: «el trono desde el que gobernaba», o usar un adjetivo: «su trono real».\n\n
14	1:2	hgm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֥ן	1	Era el nombre de una ciudad real de los reyes persas. Aparece muchas veces en la historia. Asegúrate de traducirlo con coherencia.
15	1:2	qwr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הַ⁠בִּירָֽה	1	Significa castillo o palacio donde vivía un rey. Pero dado que la propia ciudad de Susa recibe aquí el nombre de **ciudadela**, es probable que el término signifique ciudad real o capital. La persona que cuenta esta historia está identificando Susa como la capital al llamarla por el nombre de algo estrechamente asociado a ella, el palacio real dentro de ella. Una buena traducción podría ser «la capital de Persia».
16	1:3	ry7m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בִּ⁠שְׁנַ֤ת שָׁלוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠מָלְכ֔⁠וֹ	1	Esto significa que Asuero ya había gobernado durante dos años completos y que estos acontecimientos tuvieron lugar en el año que les siguió. Traducción alternativa: «durante el tercer año que Asuero gobernó su imperio» o »después de haber gobernado durante dos años»\n\n
17	1:3	qwr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	בִּ⁠שְׁנַ֤ת שָׁלוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠מָלְכ֔⁠וֹ	1	**Reinar** es un sustantivo abstracto que se refiere a la autoridad real que ejercía el rey. Se puede traducir con un verbo diciendo: «durante el tercer año que gobernó Asuero».\n\n
18	1:3	qwr5			עָשָׂ֣ה מִשְׁתֶּ֔ה	1	Traducción alternativa: «organizó una fiesta»
19	1:3	prm1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	חֵ֣יל ׀ פָּרַ֣ס וּ⁠מָדַ֗י	1	Probablemente se refiere a los líderes del ejército. Se está describiendo una parte del ejército refiriéndose a todo el ejército. Traducción alternativa: «los oficiales del ejército»\n
20	1:3	qwr7			הַֽ⁠פַּרְתְּמִ֛ים	1	Probablemente signifique algo así como «los terratenientes ricos».\n\n
21	1:3	jdr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לְ⁠פָנָֽי⁠ו	1	**Rostro** significa la presencia de una persona, por lo que esta frase significa «en su presencia». La invitación consistía en acudir a la capital real para asistir a un banquete en el que el rey estaría presente en persona. Se podría decir, como hace UST, que el rey estaba presente en persona para ofrecer el banquete. O se podría decir como alternativa, «todos ellos vinieron a Susa para el banquete»\n\n
22	1:4	qwr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ אֶת־עֹ֨שֶׁר֙ כְּב֣וֹד מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ	1	Puedes traducir el sustantivo abstracto con un adjetivo acentuado. Traducción alternativa: «Asuero ... quería demostrar ... la gran riqueza de su reino»\n\n
23	1:4	qet1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ	1	**El** Se refiere al rey. La implicación es que celebró este banquete para mostrar a todos sus funcionarios lo rico y poderoso que era. Los funcionarios invitados volvían a las diferentes partes del imperio y se lo contaban a todo el mundo. Traducción alternativa: «Asuero quería demostrar a sus invitados»\n
24	1:4	m8xa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	עֹ֨שֶׁר֙ כְּב֣וֹד מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ	1	Las palabras **riqueza** y **gloria** tienen significados similares y se usan juntas para enfatizar lo grande que era su reino. Traducción alternativa: «la gran riqueza de su reino»
25	1:4	qet3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ & וְ⁠אֶ֨ת־יְקָ֔ר תִּפְאֶ֖רֶת גְּדוּלָּת֑⁠וֹ	1	Puedes traducir los sustantivos abstractos **esplendor**, **belleza** y **grandiosidad** como adjetivos. Traducción alternativa: «Asuero ... quería demostrar ... que era un rey muy poderoso»\n\n
26	1:4	lun5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	יְקָ֔ר תִּפְאֶ֖רֶת גְּדוּלָּת֑⁠וֹ	1	Las palabras **esplendor** y **belleza** tienen un significado similar y enfatizan lo grande que era. Traducción alternativa: «el esplendor de su grandeza»\n
27	1:4	qet5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	יָמִ֣ים רַבִּ֔ים שְׁמוֹנִ֥ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת יֽוֹם	1	Era mucho tiempo para que durara un banquete real. La primera parte del versículo da la razón de ello. Para hacer explícita la conexión, se podrían añadir al versículo algunas palabras explicativas como éstas «Asuero agasajaba fabulosamente a sus invitados porque quería demostrar que su imperio era extremadamente rico y que él era un rey muy poderoso. Hizo tantas cosas por ellos que las fiestas duraron seis meses».\n\n
28	1:4	x1v6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	שְׁמוֹנִ֥ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת יֽוֹם	1	Seis meses equivalen a unos **180 días** o aproximadamente medio año. Puedes utilizar la expresión que mejor exprese este periodo de tiempo en tu idioma.\n
29	1:5	ue3x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠בִ⁠מְל֣וֹאת ׀ הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה	1	Esto implica «al final de esa fiesta». Se podría decir explícitamente. Traducción alternativa: «después de que esos 180 días terminaran» o »al final de esos seis meses»\n\n
30	1:5	fv9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	עָשָׂ֣ה הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ & מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה	1	Esta fue la segunda fiesta que organizó el rey. Probablemente lo hizo para agradecer a la gente que había trabajado tanto en la organización de la primera fiesta. Se podría decir que explícitamente.\n\n
31	1:5	mj16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֨ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֜ה	1	La expresión en este caso parece referirse específicamente a la **ciudadela** real de la que la ciudad tomó su nombre. Esta segunda fiesta no habría sido para todos los habitantes de la ciudad. Era específicamente para la gente que servía al rey en la ciudadela y que había trabajado tan duro durante los seis meses anteriores organizando la primera fiesta. Traducción alternativa: «para todos los que trabajaban para él en el palacio de Susa»\n\n
32	1:5	qet7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	הַ⁠נִּמְצְאִים֩	1	Aquí, **encontró** es un modismo que significa podría ser encontrado o estaba allí.\n
33	1:5	qet9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	הַ⁠נִּמְצְאִים֩	1	Se puede decir con una forma activa. Traducción alternativa: «que trabajaba para él en»
34	1:5	qey1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	לְ⁠מִ⁠גָּ֧דוֹל וְ⁠עַד־קָטָ֛ן	1	La persona que cuenta esta historia se refiere al personal del palacio hablando de dos partes extremas del mismo, las personas más importantes y las menos importantes que trabajaban allí, para incluir a todos los que están en medio. Se podría explicar este significado, como hace UST. Traducción alternativa: «del funcionario más importante al sirviente menos importante»\n
35	1:5	qey3			שִׁבְעַ֣ת יָמִ֑ים	1	El relato no sugiere que fuera un tiempo inusualmente largo al decir «durante muchos días». Pero también se podría decir algo como «una semana entera» para mostrar que se trataba de un generoso gesto de agradecimiento por parte del rey. Traducción alternativa: «otra fiesta que duró siete días»\n
36	1:6	qey5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ח֣וּר ׀ כַּרְפַּ֣ס וּ⁠תְכֵ֗לֶת	1	Estos **linos** eran cortinas que se colgaban en el patio. **Algodón** se refiere al color blanco de algunas de ellas. Así que esto significa cortinas blancas y azules.\n
37	1:6	qey7			ח֣וּר ׀ כַּרְפַּ֣ס וּ⁠תְכֵ֗לֶת	1	Al principio de este versículo se puede especificar que el lugar que se describe es el mismo que en el versículo anterior: «En el patio, cortinas blancas y azules».\n
38	1:6	qey9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	בְּ⁠חַבְלֵי־ב֣וּץ וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֔ן	1	**Byssus** significa «lino blanco» y se utiliza para describir el color blanco de algunos de estos cordones. Así que esto significa cordones blancos y morados.\n
39	1:6	qru1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	מִטּ֣וֹת ׀ זָהָ֣ב וָ⁠כֶ֗סֶף	1	Se puede especificar que estos sofás estaban allí para que los invitados se reclinaran mientras comían.\n\n
40	1:6	asn4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	רִֽצְפַ֥ת	1	Esta palabra se refiere probablemente a un suelo de mosaico hecho de incrustaciones de coloridas piedras preciosas.\n\n
41	1:6	eyi2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	בַּהַט	1	Se trata de una especie de piedra roja y morada que contiene trozos de cristal. Podría llamarse «feldespato» o algo descriptivo como «mármol rojo».\n
42	1:6	qru3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	וָ⁠שֵׁ֖שׁ	1	Se trata de una piedra preciosa blanca. Podrías identificarla como «alabastro». Alternativamente, aunque no es exactamente lo mismo que el mármol, tus lectores captarían la idea correcta si lo llamaras «mármol blanco».\n
43	1:6	qru5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	וְ⁠סֹחָֽרֶת	1	Esta palabra se refiere probablemente a un mármol negro que se utilizaba para crear bordes alrededor de los mosaicos. Se podría llamar «mármol negro» o simplemente decir que el suelo contenía «otra piedra preciosa».\n\n
44	1:7	urm7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠הַשְׁקוֹת֙	1	El sustantivo abstracto **servir** se refiere a cómo se sirvieron las bebidas en el banquete. Se puede traducir con un verbo diciendo: «Los asistentes sirvieron vino».\n\n
45	1:7	qru7			וְ⁠כֵלִ֖ים מִ⁠כֵּלִ֣ים שׁוֹנִ֑ים	1	Esto podría significar que «no había dos iguales». Pero también podría decir simplemente que el vino se servía en «varios tipos de copas de oro».\n\n
46	1:7	r6ec		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠יֵ֥ין מַלְכ֛וּת רָ֖ב כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Esto significa que el propio rey Asuero pagó todo el vino que bebieron los invitados a su fiesta de siete días en Susa, y que el vino procedía de su provisión personal. Traducción alternativa: «el rey fue muy generoso con el vino real» o “el rey mostró una gran disposición a dar” o »el rey lo proporcionó todo»\n
47	1:7	qru9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠יֵ֥ין מַלְכ֛וּת רָ֖ב כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Probablemente se refiere a un vino fino especial que sólo el rey podía adquirir y permitirse. Puedes traducir el sustantivo abstracto **realeza** con un adjetivo. Traducción alternativa: «vino real»\n\n
48	1:7	wpq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Aquí, **mano** se refiere al propio rey, visto a través de su acción de dar.\n\n
49	1:8	qtu1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁתִיָּ֥ה כַ⁠דָּ֖ת	1	El sustantivo abstracto **beber** no se refiere aquí a la acción de beber, sino a las pautas para servir bebidas que el rey había establecido para el banquete. Traducción alternativa: «Asuero había establecido esta norma para todos los asistentes de su casa que servían el vino»\n\n
50	1:8	g5gu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֵ֣ין אֹנֵ֑ס	1	Esto podría significar una de dos cosas: (1) A nadie se le impediría beber aunque los asistentes pensaran que ya había bebido suficiente. Traducción alternativa: «there was to be no restriction on drinking» (2) No habría obligación de beber. Traducción alternativa: «nadie debe ser obligado a beber» De cualquier manera, esta fue otra muestra de la generosidad que el rey mostró al organizar este banquete para agradecer a la gente que trabajaba para él. O bien estaba: (1) permitiéndoles beber todo lo que quisieran, o (2) no exigiéndoles que comieran y bebieran todo lo que se servía en un banquete, como normalmente se esperaba que hicieran los invitados del rey. Se podría decir explícitamente al principio del versículo que el rey estaba dando a sus invitados un privilegio especial.\n\n
51	1:8	f6px		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּי־כֵ֣ן ׀ יִסַּ֣ד הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ עַ֚ל כָּל־רַ֣ב בֵּית֔⁠וֹ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כִּ⁠רְצ֥וֹן אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ	1	Esto explica por qué nadie tenía que beber si no quería. Si fuera útil en tu lenguaje, podrías dar esta explicación (la razón) antes del resultado que explica, usando una palabra de conexión como «así que». Podrías decir: «El rey había establecido que cada capataz de su casa hiciera según el deseo del hombre por el hombre, así que la bebida era según la ley: “No hay coacción”». Traducción alternativa: «el rey hizo que los encargados que servían el vino siguieran esta regla»\n
52	1:8	qtu3			לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כִּ⁠רְצ֥וֹן אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ	1	Alternate translation: “the king wanted every guest to be able to drink as much as he wanted” or “all the guests could drink as little or as much as they wanted”
53	1:8	jdr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ	1	This is an idiom that means “everyone.”
54	1:9	qtu5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	גַּ֚ם	1	This introduces something else that was happening at the same time. You can indicate this by saying something like “during this time.”
55	1:9	qtu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	וַשְׁתִּ֣י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה	1	You can explain that she was the wife of Ahasuerus by saying, “Queen Vashti**,** the king’s wife” or “his wife.”
56	1:9	qtu9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וַשְׁתִּ֣י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה	1	This is a woman’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter and the next one. Be sure to translate it consistently.
57	1:9	qti1			מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה נָשִׁ֑ים	1	This could mean the women who served in the palace, the wives of the men who were officers and servants, or both. You could say, “a feast for the wives of the men who attended” or “for the women who worked in the palace.”
58	1:9	qti3			בֵּ֚ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת אֲשֶׁ֖ר לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ	1	Alternate translation: “the royal palace where King Ahasuerus lived”
59	1:9	qti5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	בֵּ֚ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת	1	You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with the adjective royal. Alternate translation: “royal palace”
60	1:10	jv7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠יּוֹם֙ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י	1	Alternate translation: “after six days”
61	1:10	le6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	כְּ⁠ט֥וֹב לֵב־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ בַּ⁠יָּ֑יִן	1	Here, **heart** means the action of thinking or feeling. Alternate translation: “when King Ahasuerus was in a good mood from drinking wine” or “when the king was drunk with wine”
62	1:10	dcb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	לִ֠⁠מְהוּמָן בִּזְּתָ֨א חַרְבוֹנָ֜א בִּגְתָ֤א וַ⁠אֲבַגְתָא֙ זֵתַ֣ר וְ⁠כַרְכַּ֔ס	1	These are names of seven men.
63	1:10	ens5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הַ⁠סָּ֣רִיסִ֔ים	1	This term occurs a dozen times in the story. It describes male royal officials who served as guardians for the women who lived in the palace. They were both guardians of the door, to keep unwanted people out of the women’s quarters, and guardians of the women inside, to take care of them and look after their needs. (As we learn in 2:21, some of these officials also protected the king’s private quarters.) As we see here, and as will also be seen in 2:14 and 2:16, their duties included escorting women from place to place. The term likely indicates that, in keeping with the practices of the time, these men were castrated because their work brought them into such close contact with the king’s wives and concubines. If your language has a term for such an official and you think your readers would recognize it, you could use it. Otherwise, you could use a term that describes the role that these officials played in the royal court. Alternate translation: “guardians” or “officials” or “castrated servants”
64	1:10	qti7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	הַ⁠מְשָׁ֣רְתִ֔ים אֶת־פְּנֵ֖י הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ	1	This is background information to explain who these men were. Alternate translation: “who attended him personally”
65	1:10	jdr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	אֶת־פְּנֵ֖י הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ	1	Here, **face** means the presence of a person. The phrase means that these seven men served King Ahasuerus personally.
66	1:11	qti9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	לְ֠⁠הָבִיא	1	This is the beginning of the instructions that King Ahasuerus gave to the seven eunuchs he summoned in verse 10. You can make this explicit by saying, “He told them to bring.”
67	1:11	jdr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ	1	Here, **face** means the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus wanted Queen Vashti to come personally into his presence.
68	1:11	asd1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	בְּ⁠כֶ֣תֶר מַלְכ֑וּת	1	You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with an adjective by saying, “wearing her royal crown.”
69	1:11	asd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בְּ⁠כֶ֣תֶר מַלְכ֑וּת	1	Ahasuerus likely wanted Vashti to wear her queen’s crown so that everyone would know that she was his wife. You could say that explicitly. (For the possible reasons why he wanted them to know this, see the next note.)
70	1:11	asd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	לְ⁠הַרְא֨וֹת הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֤ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִים֙ אֶת־יָפְיָ֔⁠הּ	1	Everything Ahasuerus did at his banquets was to show how rich and powerful he was. He seems to have believed that having a very beautiful wife was one more thing that proved he was a great man. So he wanted everyone to see how beautiful Vashti was. You can put this second in the verse, after explaining that Vashti was a very beautiful woman, because it accounts for what happens afterwards, when the king sends his seven personal servants to bring her in to his banquet.
71	1:11	asd7			הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֤ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִים֙	1	This might mean “his guests, especially the officials.”
72	1:11	asd9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּֽי־טוֹבַ֥ת מַרְאֶ֖ה הִֽיא	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse because it is the reason that explains everything else that happens afterward in the verse.
73	1:11	qvk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	כִּֽי־טוֹבַ֥ת מַרְאֶ֖ה הִֽיא	1	Alternate translation: “she was very beautiful”
74	1:12	asf1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	וַ⁠תְּמָאֵ֞ן הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֣ה וַשְׁתִּ֗י לָ⁠בוֹא֙	1	You can put the events in chronological order and say first that the eunuchs told Vashti what the king had commanded and then say that she refused to come**.**
75	1:12	asf3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠תְּמָאֵ֞ן הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֣ה וַשְׁתִּ֗י לָ⁠בוֹא֙	1	If your language needs to give a reason why she refused, it is most likely because she did not want a group of drunken men staring at her lustfully.
76	1:12	b57q			בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	Alternate translation: “at the king’s command” or “what the king wanted”
77	1:12	asf5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠יַ֣ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֑ים	1	Here, **hand** refers to the eunuchs themselves, viewed through their action of telling Vashti what the king had commanded. Alternation translation: “when those servants told Queen Vashti what the king wanted”
78	1:12	kp6p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֑ים	1	See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md).
79	1:12	asf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	וַ⁠יִּקְצֹ֤ף הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ מְאֹ֔ד וַ⁠חֲמָת֖⁠וֹ בָּעֲרָ֥ה בֽ⁠וֹ	1	These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize the idea that they are expressing. You could combine them as UST does by saying, “The king became so angry that he could barely contain himself.”
80	1:12	bsd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠חֲמָת֖⁠וֹ בָּעֲרָ֥ה בֽ⁠וֹ	1	Here the story uses a metaphor that pictures the king’s anger as **a fire that burned inside of him**. If your language has a different word picture that it uses to describe extreme anger, you can use that here. If not, you can translate plainly, “his anger continued to increase.”
81	1:13	asf9			לַ⁠חֲכָמִ֖ים	1	This means the king’s advisors. You could call them “his advisors” or “the royal advisors.”
82	1:13	g9fe			יֹדְעֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִתִּ֑ים	1	This means something like “who knew the right way to do things” or “who understood the culture.”
83	1:13	x2u7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	כִּי־כֵן֙ דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	This means that it was the king’s habit to consult his advisors on important questions. This is background information that explains why the king called upon these men.
84	1:13	adf1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּי־כֵן֙ דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse to put the reason before the result because it explains what happens next.
85	1:13	jd11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֕י	1	Here, **face** refers to the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus would personally ask his wise men for advice in matters like these. Alternate translation: “to consult personally with”
86	1:13	adf3			יֹדְעֵ֖י דָּ֥ת וָ⁠דִֽין	1	This means that these advisors knew the law and knew how to make good decisions in light of it.
87	1:14	adf5			וְ⁠הַ⁠קָּרֹ֣ב אֵלָ֗י⁠ו	1	Alternate translation: “the king’s closest advisors”
88	1:14	cc44		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	כַּרְשְׁנָ֤א שֵׁתָר֙ אַדְמָ֣תָא תַרְשִׁ֔ישׁ מֶ֥רֶס מַרְסְנָ֖א מְמוּכָ֑ן	1	These are the names of seven men.
89	1:14	jd13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	רֹאֵי֙ פְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	**To see the face of** is an idiom that means to be in the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus would regularly and personally consult with these seven advisors.
90	1:14	adf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	הַ⁠יֹּשְׁבִ֥ים רִאשֹׁנָ֖ה בַּ⁠מַּלְכֽוּת	1	Here, **sitting** represents ruling or judging. The expression here means that these were the most powerful officials in the empire.
91	1:15	j6sh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כְּ⁠דָת֙ מַֽה־לַּ⁠עֲשׂ֔וֹת בַּ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה וַשְׁתִּ֑י עַ֣ל ׀ אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־עָשְׂתָ֗ה אֶֽת־מַאֲמַר֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים	1	This verse presents the question that the king asked the wise men. It may be helpful to indicate this by saying something like “The king asked them.”
92	1:15	ics9			כְּ⁠דָת֙ & עַ֣ל ׀ אֲשֶׁ֣ר	1	Alternate translation: “What does the law say we should do … because … ?”
93	1:15	adf9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים	1	To present the events in chronological order, you can begin with the information that these men brought the command. Alternate translation: “Queen Vashti did not do what I told my servants to command her to do”
94	1:15	jd15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים	1	Here, **hand** represents the action of doing or giving. The phrase means that the eunuchs were the ones who told Queen Vashti what King Ahasuerus had commanded her.
95	1:15	adg1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים	1	See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md).
96	1:16	adg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מְמוּכָ֗ן לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙	1	Here, **face** represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that Memukan was speaking in the presence of the king and of the other officials. Alternate translation: “then Memukan spoke so that both the king and the officials could hear”
97	1:16	yqr8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	כָּל־הָ֣⁠עַמִּ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֕ר בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינ֖וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ	1	This means all the different people groups that were living in the empire. You could say, “all the people groups in all the provinces that King Ahasuerus rules” or more generally, “every person who lives in the entire empire of King Ahasuerus.”
98	1:16	ss5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	מְמוּכָ֗ן	1	See how you translated this man’s name in [1:14](../01/14.md).
99	1:16	adg5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ	1	Memukan speaks of **the king** in third person as a form of respect. If you want to portray him as speaking primarily to the king because he is answering the king’s question, you could have him say, “in all the provinces that you rule” or “every person who lives in your entire empire.”
100	1:17	jd17		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּֽי	1	This introduces the reason why Memukan says that Queen Vashti has done wrong against all the men in the kingdom and not only against King Ahasuerus. To show that, you can begin with “This is what will happen.”
101	1:17	gn4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	יֵצֵ֤א דְבַר־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּה֙ עַל־כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים	1	To emphasize his point, Memukan exaggerates and says that every single woman in the empire will hear about Queen Vashti refusing to obey King Ahasuerus. You could say, as UST does, that “women all over the empire” will hear about what the queen did. Or you could preserve Memukan’s manner of speaking by saying, “every woman” will hear.
102	1:17	jd19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לְ⁠הַבְז֥וֹת בַּעְלֵי⁠הֶ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֑ן	1	Here, **eyes** stand for seeing, and seeing means knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that the women will treat their husbands with disrespect and not obey them. Alternate translation: “women will despise their husbands”
103	1:17	adg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בְּ⁠אָמְרָ֗⁠ם הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֡וֹשׁ אָמַ֞ר לְ⁠הָבִ֨יא אֶת־וַשְׁתִּ֧י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו וְ⁠לֹא־בָֽאָה	1	The implication is that they will go on to say, “So if even the queen can disobey the king, why should I have to obey my husband?” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly.
104	1:17	adg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֡וֹשׁ אָמַ֞ר לְ⁠הָבִ֨יא אֶת־וַשְׁתִּ֧י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו וְ⁠לֹא־בָֽאָה	1	The women will stop respecting their husbands after they hear about this. You can put this report about what Queen Vashti did first, before “women will stop respecting their husbands,” because it is the reason that explains that result.
105	1:17	jd21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו	1	Here, **face** means the presence of a person. The phrase means the Queen Vashti refused to come into the presence of King Ahasuerus when he summoned her during the feast. See how you translated this in verse 11.
106	1:18	afg1			וְֽ⁠הַ⁠יּ֨וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֜ה	1	Alternate translation: “even today” or “even this very day”
107	1:18	afg3			שָׂר֣וֹת פָּֽרַס־וּ⁠מָדַ֗י	1	It becomes clear later in the verse that Memukan is speaking of the wives of the king’s officials, and you could communicate that here by saying, “the wives of the officials who govern Persia and Media.” But the term “noblewomen” indicates that they also had high status of their own, so you could also call them “the leading women of Persia and Media.”
108	1:18	afg5			דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה	1	Alternate translation: “what the queen has done”
109	1:18	afg7			תֹּאמַ֣רְנָה	1	This means that they will “talk back” or “disobey.” Alternate translation: “refuse to obey”
110	1:18	afg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	לְ⁠כֹ֖ל שָׂרֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	This means the husbands of the noblewomen. The implication may be, “They will disobey their husbands even though they are officials of the king.” You could say that explicitly, as UST does.
111	1:18	u6d7			וּ⁠כְ⁠דַ֖י בִּזָּי֥וֹן וָ⁠קָֽצֶף	1	This could mean either that they will treat their husbands with disrespect, and this will make their “husbands angry with them” or that “they will be angry with their husbands and treat them with contempt.”
112	1:18	afh1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠כְ⁠דַ֖י	1	This could mean that the husbands will be as furious “as much as they can bear.” But you could also say, “That will be bad enough by itself, even if the news does not spread any farther.” If you think that is the meaning, you can say that explicitly, as UST does.
113	1:19	afh3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֗וֹב	1	This is an idiom that means “if the king thinks this is a good idea” or “if this advice is pleasing to the king.”
114	1:19	d8qk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֗וֹב	1	Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “If it pleases you”
115	1:19	jd25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	יֵצֵ֤א דְבַר־מַלְכוּת֙ מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו	1	Here, **face** represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that the decree will come from the king himself. Alternate translation: “you should personally issue a royal decree” or “you should write a decree yourself”
116	1:19	afh5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	דְבַר־מַלְכוּת֙	1	You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with the adjective “royal.” Alternate translation: “royal decree”
117	1:19	jd23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו	1	Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “personally”
118	1:19	afh7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠יִכָּתֵ֛ב	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “you should write a decree yourself” or “command your scribes to write a decree”
119	1:19	mh1a			וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲב֑וֹר	1	Alternate translation: “these laws never become invalid” or “can never be changed”
120	1:19	jd27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	תָב֜וֹא & לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ	1	Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “never come into your presence again”
121	1:19	jd29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	תָב֜וֹא & לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ	1	Here, **face** represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that Queen Vashti will never again come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “never again come before King Ahasuerus”
122	1:19	jd31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	וּ⁠מַלְכוּתָ⁠הּ֙ יִתֵּ֣ן הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠רְעוּתָ֖⁠הּ הַ⁠טּוֹבָ֥ה מִמֶּֽ⁠נָּה	1	Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You can show the same meaning with a verb that addresses a singular “you” and indicates that Memukan is offering advice, not giving a command when he say, “choose another woman to be queen.” Alternate translation: “the king can give her position as queen to some other woman”
123	1:19	afh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וּ⁠מַלְכוּתָ⁠הּ֙	1	You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with an expression such as “her royal position” or “her position as queen.”
124	1:19	afj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הַ⁠טּוֹבָ֥ה מִמֶּֽ⁠נָּה	1	Memukan means that the next queen should be “better than” Vashti by obeying all of the king’s commands. You could say this explicitly, as UST does.
125	1:20	v9l3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִשְׁמַע֩ פִּתְגָ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “when everyone … hears”
126	1:20	des3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	פִּתְגָ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ	1	Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person: “When they hear what you have commanded.” Alternate translation: “when they hear the king’s decree”
127	1:20	jd33		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֲשֶֽׁר־יַעֲשֶׂה֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ	1	Even though the decree of Ahasuerus applied only to Vashti directly, implicitly it meant that all wives had to obey their husbands or else their husbands could banish and divorce them as well. You can say this explicitly at the end of the verse by saying, “because if any wife disobeys her husband, he can banish and divorce her, just as you did to Vashti.”
128	1:20	afj3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ	1	Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “for all your kingdom”
129	1:20	p8nz			כִּ֥י רַבָּ֖ה הִ֑יא	1	Alternate translation: “even though your empire is very large”
130	1:20	afj5			הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֗ים יִתְּנ֤וּ יְקָר֙ לְ⁠בַעְלֵי⁠הֶ֔ן	1	Alternate translation: “women will respect and obey their husbands”
131	1:20	be9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	לְ⁠מִ⁠גָּד֖וֹל וְ⁠עַד־קָטָֽן	1	This expression refers to all of the husbands in the empire. By naming both extremes, it includes everyone in between. You could just give the meaning, as UST does: “every husband in the empire.” Alternate translation: “this will be true for both the most important man and the least important man in the empire, and everyone in between”
132	1:21	afj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּיטַב֙ הַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ	1	Like “if it is good to the king” in verse 19, this is an idiom that means the king thought this was a good idea or this advice pleased the king.
133	1:21	afj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֑ים	1	Here, **eyes** stand for seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus and all the officials who heard Memukan’s advice thought that his suggestion was a good idea.
134	1:21	agj1			וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר מְמוּכָֽן	1	This means that King Ahasuerus wrote a law proclaiming what Memukan had suggested.
135	1:21	p5us		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	מְמוּכָֽן	1	Translate his name as in [1:14](../01/14.md).
136	1:22	agj3			וַ⁠יִּשְׁלַ֤ח סְפָרִים֙ אֶל־כָּל־מְדִינ֣וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	**He** means King Ahasuerus. This is saying that the king sent letters to every province in his empire.
137	1:22	jd37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙	1	This is an idiom that means “every province” or every single province.
138	1:22	agj5			כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ	1	Alternate translation: “using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script”
139	1:22	jd39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם	1	This is an idiom that means “every people group” or every single people group.
140	1:22	jd41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ	1	Here, **tongue** means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “in its own language”
141	1:22	jj9n			לִ⁠הְי֤וֹת כָּל־אִישׁ֙ שֹׂרֵ֣ר בְּ⁠בֵית֔⁠וֹ	1	This meant that all men should have complete authority over their wives and their children.
142	1:22	jd43		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כִּ⁠לְשׁ֥וֹן עַמּֽ⁠וֹ	1	Here, **tongue** means the language spoken by a person or a group of people.
143	1:22	agj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כִּ⁠לְשׁ֥וֹן עַמּֽ⁠וֹ	1	The implication is that the husband ought to be able to give orders to his wife in his own native language and that she should understand and obey him, even if she had to learn his language to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly.
144	2:intro	eb4q				0	# Esther 2 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Esther becomes queen\n\nEsther was humble and took the advice of the royal officials about how to dress for her time with the king. The king chose Esther to be the new queen.\n\n### Mordecai warns the king against a plot\n\nEsther’s cousin, Mordecai, discovered that two men planned to kill the king. He told Esther, who then told the king. She also gave Mordecai credit for telling her.
145	2:1	dpc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	אַחַר֙ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה	1	This introduces a new event that happened some time later, but we do not know how much later. You can show this with a phrase like “After some time had passed.”
146	2:1	e4lp			כְּ⁠שֹׁ֕ךְ חֲמַ֖ת הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ	1	Alternate translation: “when King Ahasuerus was not angry any more” or “when King Ahasuerus became less angry”
147	2:1	agj9			זָכַ֤ר אֶת־וַשְׁתִּי֙	1	This means that he started to think about Vashti. He probably thought about the things that he liked about her, meaning that he missed her.
148	2:1	xpt9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֲשֶׁר־עָשָׂ֔תָה וְ⁠אֵ֥ת אֲשֶׁר־נִגְזַ֖ר עָלֶֽי⁠הָ	1	This refers to Vashti’s refusal to obey Ahasuerus, and to the decision he made in [1:21](../01/21.md) that she could never come into his presence again. This could actually mean that when he thought about Vashti and what she had done, he regretted the decision that he had made about her. But there was nothing he could do to bring her back because the laws of the empire could not be changed. You could explain all or some of this in your translation, as in the UST.
149	2:1	agk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	אֲשֶׁר־נִגְזַ֖ר עָלֶֽי⁠הָ	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say that the king performed the action. Alternate translation: “what he had decided”
150	2:2	agk3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	נַעֲרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ מְשָׁרְתָ֑י⁠ו	1	These were not the older, wiser royal advisors whom Ahasuerus consulted in [1:13](../01/13.md), but younger men who stood nearby the king ready to help with any practical needs. You could call them his personal servants.
151	2:2	agk5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	יְבַקְשׁ֥וּ לַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ נְעָר֥וֹת	1	Implicit in this suggestion is the idea, “You should get a new wife for yourself.” You can say that explicitly at the beginning of the advice that the young men gave to the king.
152	2:2	s4hv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	יְבַקְשׁ֥וּ	1	**Ellos** se refiere a los sirvientes that the king would send to do this. If this is unclear, you could say “servants” or “your servants.” Be sure to express this in a form that shows that it is a not a command but a respectful suggestion such as “You could send some men.” Alternate translation: “to look for”
153	2:2	zi03		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	לַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ	1	The young men speak to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternatively, you could have them say “for yourself” or “on your behalf” if that would be clear but also respectful in your language
154	2:2	jd45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	טוֹב֥וֹת מַרְאֶֽה	1	As in 1:11, this is an idiom that means very beautiful.
155	2:3	g9vp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	וְ⁠יַפְקֵ֨ד הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ	1	The young men speak to the king in third person as a sign of respect. Alternatively, you could have them say “you could appoint” in a respectful way
156	2:3	jd47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	טוֹבַ֨ת מַרְאֶ֜ה	1	As in 1:11, this is an idiom that means very beautiful.
157	2:3	xqf9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	שׁוּשַׁ֤ן הַ⁠בִּירָה֙	1	In this context, this expression probably means “to the palace here in Susa.”
158	2:3	j4ka			בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים	1	This means the harem for virgins, the place where the young women would live and receive beauty treatments before they were taken to the king (See: verses 13 and 14).
159	2:3	d754		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	אֶל־יַ֥ד הֵגֶ֛א סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “let Hegai, the king’s official, who is in charge of the women, take care of them”
160	2:3	jd49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	יַ֥ד הֵגֶ֛א	1	Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. As the overseer of the women, Hegai was responsible for the young women who lived in the harem for virgins. Alternate translation: “under the custody of Hegai”
161	2:3	lf71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הֵגֶ֛א	1	This is a man’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter. Be sure to translate it consistently.
162	2:3	jd51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ	1	The servants spoke to the king in third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “your eunuch”
163	2:3	agk7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	סְרִ֥יס	1	See how you translated this term in 1:10. Alternate translation: “the official of” or “the administrator of”
164	2:3	agk9			שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים	1	Alternate translation: “who is in charge of the women who live there.”
165	2:3	w1ly		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	תַּמְרוּקֵי⁠הֶֽן	1	This term seems to refer to a specific substance that women would put on their face or other parts of their body to make themselves more beautiful. From verse 12, it appears to mean lotions that were used along with oils and perfumes. But here, this one aspect of a woman’s beauty treatment seems to be used to refer to all of it, so you could call these “beauty treatments.”
166	2:4	jd53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	וְ⁠הַֽ⁠נַּעֲרָ֗ה אֲשֶׁ֤ר תִּיטַב֙ בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	The servants spoke to the king in third person as a sign of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person by saying something such as “the young woman you like the best.”
167	2:4	lh3n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י	1	Here, **eyes** represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus could decide which young woman he liked the best and make her queen.
168	2:4	jd55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּיטַ֧ב הַ⁠דָּבָ֛ר בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ	1	Here, **eyes** have the same figurative meaning. The phrase indicates that King Ahasuerus thought that this suggestion was a good idea. Alternate translation: “The king found their suggestion appealing”
169	2:4	zxc1			וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ כֵּֽן	1	Alternate translation: “so he followed the suggestion”
170	2:5	h6z2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	אִ֣ישׁ יְהוּדִ֔י	1	This introduces Mordecai as a new character in the story. Use your language’s way of introducing a new character. This expression means a Jewish man.
171	2:5	uu9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֑ה	1	Here the phrase likely indicates the city rather than the palace, that is, the capital city of Susa.
172	2:5	zxc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	מָרְדֳּכַ֗י	1	This is a man’s name. It occurs many times throughout the story. Be sure to translate it consistently.
173	2:5	q2rz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בֶּ֣ן יָאִ֧יר בֶּן־שִׁמְעִ֛י בֶּן־קִ֖ישׁ	1	These are men’s names. Jair, Shimei, and Kish are Mordecai’s male ancestors. You could say, “Mordecai was the son of Jair, who was the son of Shimei, who was the son of Kish,” or see the UST.
174	2:5	kw5t			אִ֥ישׁ יְמִינִֽי	1	While this likely refers to Kish, it is necessarily also true of Mordecai, and you could put it second in the verse. That way Mordecai’s nationality would come first, then his tribe, and then his family and clan. Alternate translation: “from the tribe of Benjamin”
175	2:6	zxc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם עִם־הַ⁠גֹּלָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר הָגְלְתָ֔ה עִ֖ם יְכָנְיָ֣ה מֶֽלֶךְ־יְהוּדָ֑ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶגְלָ֔ה נְבוּכַדְנֶאצַּ֖ר מֶ֥לֶךְ בָּבֶֽל	1	The story now tells about something that happened many years before. This is background information that explains how this Jewish family came to live in Susa. You can introduce this by saying something like, “Many years earlier.”
176	2:6	z7fe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “King Nebuchadnezzar of Babylon had taken Kish away from Jerusalem along with some other captives”
177	2:6	egm7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם	1	You can bring this information forward from later in the verse because it provides background information that helps identify Mordecai.
178	2:6	zxc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could say where King Nebuchadnezzar brought the people that he took away from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “had taken Kish away from Jerusalem … and brought him to Babylon.”
179	2:6	zxc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	עִ֖ם	1	This means that the two things happened at the same time. You can indicate this with a phrase like “at the same time that he took.”
180	2:6	ch1t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	יְכָנְיָ֣ה מֶֽלֶךְ־יְהוּדָ֑ה	1	In the historical passage where this event is described (2 Kings 24:8–17), this king is called Jehoiachin. That was another name by which he was known. You can call him Jehoiachin here in Esther if you think that would help your readers recognize him better.
181	2:6	zxv1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶגְלָ֔ה נְבוּכַדְנֶאצַּ֖ר מֶ֥לֶךְ בָּבֶֽל	1	You can say where King Nebuchadnezzar brought this king when he took him away from Jerusalem. For example, you can say, “Nebuchadnezzar … took King Jehoiachin of Judah away from Jerusalem and brought him to Babylon.”
182	2:7	zxv3			וַ⁠יְהִ֨י	1	The story now returns to talking about Mordecai. If it is helpful for your readers, you can specify his name, saying, “Now, Mordecai.”
183	2:7	hfm9			בַּת־דֹּד֔⁠וֹ	1	If your language has a specific term for this relationship, you can use it. For example, you can say, “his cousin.” Alternate translation: “his uncle’s daughter”
184	2:7	m9kx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הֲדַסָּ֗ה הִ֤יא אֶסְתֵּר֙	1	Here the story is indicating that this woman’s Hebrew name was Hadassah and her Persian name was Esther. You could say that explicitly.
185	2:7	zxv7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶסְתֵּר֙	1	This is a woman’s name. It occurs many times throughout the story. Be sure to translate it consistently.
186	2:7	ccb1			אֵ֥ין לָ֖⁠הּ אָ֣ב וָ⁠אֵ֑ם	1	You could say simply that “she was an orphan,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “both her father and mother had died”
187	2:7	jd59		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	וְ⁠הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֤ה יְפַת־תֹּ֨אַר֙ וְ⁠טוֹבַ֣ת מַרְאֶ֔ה	1	These two phrases mean something similar. Separately, they could be saying that Esther was both sexually mature and very attractive. But taken together, they mean that, overall, she was very pleasant to look at. You could combine them, as UST does, and say that she was “exceptionally attractive” Alternate translation: “she had a lovely body and a beautiful face”
188	2:7	skt5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	וּ⁠בְ⁠מ֤וֹת אָבִ֨י⁠הָ֙ וְ⁠אִמָּ֔⁠הּ לְקָחָ֧⁠הּ מָרְדֳּכַ֛י ל֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠בַֽת	1	This is background information explaining the relationship between Mordecai and Esther. You can move it to right after the place where Esther is introduced by name because it describes what happened in the past, before Esther became a beautiful young woman. Alternate translation: “after her father and her mother had died, Mordecai had adopted her as his own daughter”
189	2:8	zxv9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֗י	1	After providing this background information about Mordecai and Esther in verses 5–7, the story now tells what happened as a result of these facts, when the provincial officers described in verse 3 began sending young women to the harem. That is, the story tells what happened to Esther because her family was living in the Persian empire and she was very attractive. Use your language’s way of showing that the events are now moving forward after giving background information. Alternate translation: “and so this is what happened”
190	2:8	zcv1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת	1	This indicates that two actions took place at the same time. You should indicate this with a phrase like “at the same time.”
191	2:8	zcv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “when the messengers proclaimed the king’s decree and the scribes published the king’s law.”
192	2:8	c52i			דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙	1	This refers to King Ahasuerus banishing Queen Vashti from his presence.
193	2:8	zcv5			וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ	1	This refers to King Ahasuerus commanding that men would have complete authority over their wives.
194	2:8	zcv7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע	1	You could also say where they did this action. Alternate translation: “Messengers went throughout the empire and proclaimed”
195	2:8	m3ld		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. See the UST.
196	2:8	jd65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	שׁוּשַׁ֥ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֖ה	1	Here again, this likely means “the capital city of Susa.”
197	2:8	mbk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	אֶל־יַ֣ד הֵגָ֑י	1	Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. As the overseer of the women, Hegai was responsible for the women in the harem for virgins. You could say that the officers “put them under the custody of Hegai” or that “Hegai began to take care of them.”
198	2:8	zcv9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	וַ⁠יְהִ֗י בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע & וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ & וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח	1	This means that Esther was brought to the harem of King Ahaserus at the same time as other young women were also being brought to the harem. You can say, “they brought Esther at the same time” or “they also brought Esther.”
199	2:8	n3zc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח	1	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they brought Esther”
200	2:8	zcb1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח	1	You can explain why this happened. For example, you can say, “Because Esther was exceptionally attractive, the officers also brought her”
201	2:8	zcb3			בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	Alternate translation: “the king’s palace”
202	2:8	jd71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	אֶל־יַ֥ד הֵגַ֖י שֹׁמֵ֥ר הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים	1	As earlier in this verse, this means under the custody of Hegai or that Hegai also began to take care of her.
203	2:8	zcb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	שֹׁמֵ֥ר הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים	1	This means that Hegai took care of the young women who lived in the harem for virgins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move this information to earlier in the verse when Hegai is first mentioned because it explains why the young women were brought to him.
204	2:9	zcb7			וַ⁠תִּיטַ֨ב הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮ וַ⁠תִּשָּׂ֣א חֶ֣סֶד לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒	1	This means that Hegai found Esther attractive, and she obtained kindness from him or that Hegai was very impressed with Esther, and she won his favor. In other words, because he was so impressed with her, this made him want to do everything he could to help her. This is background information that explains why Hegai took the actions that are listed next.
205	2:9	zcb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וַ⁠תִּיטַ֨ב הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮	1	Here, **eyes** represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. In this context, the phrase probably means that Hegai thought that Esther was either an attractive woman or a pleasant person, or both.
206	2:9	f8i8			הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה	1	This means Esther. You should make sure that this is clear in your translation.
207	2:9	jd75			בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮	1	Here, **his** refers to Hegai. You should make sure that this clear in your translation.
208	2:9	jd77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וַ⁠תִּשָּׂ֣א חֶ֣סֶד לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒	1	Here, **face** represents the presence of a person. To say that she “lifted kindness before his face” is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. In this context, it could even suggest that Esther and Hegai became friends. Alternate translation: “she won his favor”
209	2:9	jd79			לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒	1	Here, **his** refers to Hegai. You should make sure that this clear in your translation.
210	2:9	abc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	תַּמְרוּקֶ֤י⁠הָ	1	Alternate translation: “her beauty treatments,” as in [2:3](../02/03.md).
211	2:9	abc2			מָנוֹתֶ֨⁠הָ֙	1	In context, this likely means that Hegai made sure that Esther was served good food that would keep her healthy.
212	2:9	abc3			שֶׁ֣בַע הַ⁠נְּעָר֔וֹת הָ⁠רְאֻי֥וֹת לָֽ⁠תֶת־לָ֖⁠הּ מִ⁠בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	This means that Hegai chose seven female servants from the king’s palace and assigned them to take care of Esther.
213	2:9	abc4			וַ⁠יְשַׁנֶּ֧⁠הָ וְ⁠אֶת־נַעֲרוֹתֶ֛י⁠הָ	1	**Her** means Esther, and **her young women** means the female attendants Hegai assigned to her.
214	2:10	abc6			לֹא־הִגִּ֣ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֔ר אֶת־עַמָּ֖⁠הּ וְ⁠אֶת־מֽוֹלַדְתָּ֑⁠הּ	1	This means that Esther had not told anyone this information about herself.
215	2:10	abc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	אֶת־עַמָּ֖⁠הּ וְ⁠אֶת־מֽוֹלַדְתָּ֑⁠הּ	1	These two short phrases mean almost the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that Esther followed Mordecai’s instructions exactly. You could combine them, as UST does, and say something like “what people group she was from.” Alternate translation: “Esther did not tell anyone that she was a Jew, and she did not tell anyone who her relatives were”
216	2:10	abc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּ֧י מָרְדֳּכַ֛י צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ	1	This is background information that explains why Esther did not tell anyone about her family or nationality. It might be helpful to your readers to state this at the beginning of the verse.
217	2:10	abc9			צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ	1	This means that Mordecai had gotten her to promise not to do it.
218	2:11	jd81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־י֣וֹם וָ⁠י֔וֹם	1	Alternate translation: “every single day”
219	2:11	abd1			מָרְדֳּכַי֙ מִתְהַלֵּ֔ךְ	1	Express this in the way your language describes an action that someone repeats over and over. For example, you can say, “Mordecai would walk around.”
220	2:11	jd83		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י חֲצַ֣ר	1	Here, **face** means the front of a place. So you could say, “in front of the courtyard.”
221	2:11	abd2			בֵּית־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים	1	Alternate translation: “the harem for virgins”
222	2:11	abd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	לָ⁠דַ֨עַת֙ אֶת־שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר וּ⁠מַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה בָּֽ⁠הּ	1	This is background information that explains why Mordecai would walk around in front of the courtyard. It was so that he could ask people who were going into or coming out of the courtyard how Esther was doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse because it explains the rest of what is said.
223	2:11	nz1p			שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר	1	Alternate translation: “how Esther was doing” or “about Esther’s well-being”
224	2:11	abd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר וּ⁠מַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה בָּֽ⁠הּ	1	These two phrases mean similar things. The story is using the repetition to emphasize how concerned Mordecai was for Esther. You could combine them and say, “how Esther was doing” or “if Esther was all right.”
225	2:12	jcj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֡יעַ	1	Verses 12 to 14 are background information about how the virgins who were gathered for the king became his concubines. These verses are not specifically about Esther, but about the women in general. Use your language’s way of letting your readers know that this is background information by using a connecting word or a phrase such as, “This is how virgins became concubines for the king.”
226	2:12	jd85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	נַעֲרָ֨ה וְ⁠נַעֲרָ֜ה	1	Alternate translation: “each one of the young women”
227	2:12	abd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֡יעַ תֹּר֩ & לָ⁠ב֣וֹא ׀ אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ	1	Each of these young women was going to have sexual relations with the king and, as a result, legally become one of his concubines, that is, one of his secondary wives. As the story has already explained, he would then choose one of them to become his queen and primary wife. But the king would still provide for each of the concubines for the rest of her life; they would not be free to marry anyone else. This is something that the story’s original audience would have understood implicitly. you could say it explicitly if your readers need this information to understand the story: “Each young woman in the harem, one at a time, was going to have sexual relations with King Ahasuerus and become one of his concubines” or “one of his secondary wives.”
228	2:12	p7i5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	כְּ⁠דָ֤ת הַ⁠נָּשִׁים֙	1	Here, **law** probably does not mean a legal decree, but rather a standard regimen that had been developed.
229	2:12	abd7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	כִּ֛י כֵּ֥ן יִמְלְא֖וּ יְמֵ֣י מְרוּקֵי⁠הֶ֑ן	1	This phrase indicates that the story is now going to provide background information on how these treatments were done. It means, “This is how these women would spend the time preparing to go to the king.”
230	2:12	abd8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	שִׁשָּׁ֤ה חֳדָשִׁים֙ בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מֹּ֔ר	1	This means that a woman’s attendants would rub her body with olive oil mixed with myrrh every day for six months. you could explain this in more detail if your readers need this information to understand the story.
231	2:12	abd9			בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מֹּ֔ר	1	This likely means “olive oil mixed with myrrh.”
232	2:12	zhd1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	וּ⁠בְ⁠תַמְרוּקֵ֖י הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים	1	This means lotions designed for women. In 2:3 and 2:9, this one specific part of the program seems to be used to mean all of it, and so in those verses it can be translated “beauty treatments.” But it should be translated with a specific term or phrase here, such as “women’s lotions” or “feminine ointments” because it is named along with oils and perfumes as one component of the treatment.
233	2:13	abd0			וּ⁠בָ⁠זֶ֕ה	1	Alternate translation: “after a woman’s year of beauty treatments was completed”
234	2:13	abe0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הַֽ⁠נַּעֲרָ֖ה בָּאָ֣ה אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	This means that the young woman would go and have sexual relations with the king and thereby become one of his concubines. If your readers need this information to understand the story, you could explain that here, if you did not do so in verse 12.
235	2:13	abe1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר תֹּאמַ֜ר יִנָּ֤תֵֽן לָ⁠הּ֙	1	**Anything** most likely refers to clothing and jewelry. This phrase probably means that a woman could take any of those that she wanted from the harem for virgins and wear them when she went to the king’s palace. You could say that explicitly by saying, “A young woman could take whatever clothing and jewelry she wanted from the harem for virgins and wear them when she went to the king’s palace.”
236	2:13	v133		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר תֹּאמַ֜ר יִנָּ֤תֵֽן לָ⁠הּ֙	1	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “she could take whatever she wanted”
237	2:13	xx9x			בֵּ֥ית הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Alternate translation: “the king’s rooms” or “the king’s house” or “the king’s palace”
238	2:13	abe3			בֵּ֥ית הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Alternate translation: “the king’s rooms” or “the king’s house” or “the king’s palace”
239	2:14	abe4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הִ֣יא בָאָ֗ה	1	She would not walk over on her own. Rather, the king’s servants would come and bring her to the king’s private quarters, in the way that they were told to bring Vashti to the banquet in [1:11](../01/11.md). you could say this explicitly if it would help your readers to understand the story.
240	2:14	ded5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ֠⁠בַ⁠בֹּקֶר הִ֣יא שָׁבָ֞ה	1	It is implied that this is the following morning. This information can be made clear. Once again, she would not go on her own. Alternate translation: “the next morning the king’s servants would bring her to”
241	2:14	lq9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בֵּ֤ית הַ⁠נָּשִׁים֙ שֵׁנִ֔י	1	Alternate translations: “a different house for women” or “the harem for concubines”
242	2:14	yw63			אֶל־יַ֧ד שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים	1	Alternate translation: “where Shaashgaz, the king’s servant in charge of the concubines, would take care of her”
243	2:14	ze74		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	אֶל־יַ֧ד שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים	1	Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. Just as Hegai was the overseer of the virgins, Shaashgaz was the overseer of the concubines, so he would be the one responsible for Esther while she was in the harem for concubines. Alternate translation: “under the custody of Shaashgaz”
244	2:14	q5yx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז	1	This is a man’s name.
245	2:14	abe5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ	1	See how you translated this term, **eunuch**, in [1:10](../01/10.md). You could say “royal” rather than “of the king.”
246	2:14	abe6			שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים	1	This means that Shaashgaz was the official who *took care of the concubines* or who was responsible for the concubines.
247	2:14	abe7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים	1	As a **concubine**, the young woman was one of the king’s secondary wives. She would live in this harem for the rest of her life. She was not free to return to her family or to marry anybody else. If it would help your readers to understand the story, you could explain all or part of this to your readers here, if you did not do so in 2:12 or 2:13.
248	2:14	abe8			לֹא־תָב֥וֹא עוֹד֙ אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	In verse 12, the Note mentioned that “go to the king” meant “have sexual relations with the king.” But for this occurrence of the expression, it is appropriate to use a more general phrase such as “visit the king” because there could be other, more social reasons for a further visit. The woman would now be a secondary wife, and the king would only send for her if he decided that he enjoyed being with her. Alternate translation: “She would not go and see the king again”
249	2:14	abe9			חָפֵ֥ץ בָּ֛⁠הּ	1	This means that he “had enjoyed being with her” or that she “had pleased the king very much.”
250	2:14	abf0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִקְרְאָ֥ה בְ⁠שֵֽׁם	1	You can say this with an active form. For example, you can say, “and the king asked for her by name” or “and called for her by name.”
251	2:15	fiy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֣יעַ תֹּר־אֶסְתֵּ֣ר & לָ⁠ב֣וֹא אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ	1	The story resumes here after the background information that was provided in verses 12–14 about what the women in the harem did when they became concubines of the king. A contrast is being drawn. A young woman could take any clothing and jewelry she wanted from the harem. But Esther only asked for what Hegai recommended. So it would be good to introduce this episode with a word such as “but,” which draws a contrast.
252	2:15	jk51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	בַּת־אֲבִיחַ֣יִל דֹּ֣ד מָרְדֳּכַ֡י אֲשֶׁר֩ לָקַֽח־ל֨⁠וֹ לְ⁠בַ֜ת	1	This background information reminds the reader who Esther was by describing her relationship to Mordecai. You could make this a separate sentence and move it later in the verse to keep from breaking up the flow of the first sentence about what Esther did.
253	2:15	mg8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֲבִיחַ֣יִל	1	This man was Esther’s father and Mordecai’s uncle.
254	2:15	qx3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	לֹ֤א בִקְשָׁה֙ דָּבָ֔ר כִּ֠י אִ֣ם אֶת־אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י	1	You can state this in a positive form by saying, “she asked only for.” Alternate translation: “she did not ask for anything else to wear except”
255	2:15	vw9r			אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י	1	Alternate translation: “what Hegai recommended” or “what Hegai suggested”
256	2:15	abf1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י	1	As the king’s personal servant, **Hegai** would have known what kind of clothing and jewelry Ahasuerus found attractive on a woman. By following his advice, Esther showed that she trusted Hegai. This is implicit information that you could make explicit if it would help the reader to understand the story. You might say, for example, “Hegai knew the king’s preferences because he was his personal servant. Esther had come to trust Hegai and so she followed his advice.” This could go at the end of the verse or in a footnote.
257	2:15	abf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	סְרִיס־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים	1	This is saying that Hegai was the royal official responsible for the women in the harem for virgins. This is background information that reminds the reader who Hegai was by describing his responsibilities. You could also move this to the end of the verse and put it in parentheses.
258	2:15	abf3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	סְרִיס־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ	1	See how you decided to translate the term **eunuch** in [1:10](../01/10.md). You could say “royal” for “of the king.”
259	2:15	z519		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	נֹשֵׂ֣את חֵ֔ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י כָּל־רֹאֶֽי⁠הָ	1	This is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. In this context, the expression probably means that everyone who saw Esther dressed in the clothes she would wear for her visit to the king was very impressed with the way she looked. Alternate translation: “pleased all who saw her”
260	2:15	jd87		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י	1	Here, **eyes** is a metonym for seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. In this context, the phrase probably means that everyone who saw Esther thought that she was either an attractive woman or a pleasant person, or both. Alternate translation: “in the judgment of”
261	2:15	jd89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	כָּל־רֹאֶֽי⁠הָ	1	This phrase can mean either **every man or every person who saw her**. Alternate translation: “every man who saw her”
262	2:16	jd91		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֨ח אֶסְתֵּ֜ר	1	You can say this with an active form by saying, for example, “The king’s servants brought Esther.”
263	2:16	abf5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	אֶל־בֵּ֣ית מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ	1	You can use an adjective to translate the abstract noun **royalty.** For example, you can say, “in his royal palace”
264	2:16	jd92		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠עֲשִׂירִ֖י	1	Alternate translation: “in month ten”
265	2:16	jr5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths	הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת	1	**Tebeth** is the name of the tenth month of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “that is, the month of Tebeth”
266	2:16	abf6			חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת	1	The story is being recorded from the perspective of the Persian court. But for the benefit of its intended Jewish audience, the Hebrew name of the month is given.
267	2:16	abf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת	1	You could convert the Hebrew days and months into approximate dates on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the dates will be different every year and the translation will not be quite accurate. So you may just want to provide the Hebrew days and months.
268	2:16	x6yg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בִּ⁠שְׁנַת־שֶׁ֖בַע לְ⁠מַלְכוּתֽ⁠וֹ	1	Alternate translation: “during the seventh year of the reign of Ahasuerus as king of Persia”
269	2:17	p3s7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	וַ⁠יֶּאֱהַ֨ב הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֶת־אֶסְתֵּר֙ מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠בְּתוּלֹ֑ת	1	These two phrases mean almost the same thing. The information is given twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that Ahasuerus was completely convinced that Esther was the one he should make his queen**.** “More than all the virgins” basically duplicates the meaning of “more than all the women,” so, if this duplication would be confusing in your language, you don’t need to include both phrases, or you could say, “more than all of them” for the second phrase.
270	2:17	abf8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים	1	This means all the other women who had been brought to the king and who became his concubines.
271	2:17	bcu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו	1	This is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. See how you translated similar phrases in [2:9](../02/09.md) and [2:15](../02/15.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. In this context, it probably means that King Ahasuerus was very impressed with both Esther’s appearance and her personality.
272	2:17	abf9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו	1	**Favor** and **kindness** mean similar things and are probably used together here to strengthen a single idea. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased with her”
273	2:17	jd93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו	1	Here, **face** represents the presence of a person.
274	2:17	sym3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠יָּ֤שֶׂם כֶּֽתֶר־מַלְכוּת֙ בְּ⁠רֹאשָׁ֔⁠הּ	1	Ahasuerus did this to show that he was making Esther his queen.
275	2:17	abg0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	כֶּֽתֶר־מַלְכוּת֙	1	To translate the abstract noun **royalty**, you can use an adjective such as a “royal” crown.
276	2:18	abg1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יַּ֨עַשׂ הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ מִשְׁתֶּ֣ה גָד֗וֹל	1	The king did this to celebrate Esther becoming the queen. You can say this explicitly. For example, you can say, “Then, to celebrate her becoming the queen, the king hosted a great feast.”
277	2:18	b1hd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה אֶסְתֵּ֑ר	1	You could indicate to your readers this is the name that Ahasuerus gave to the feast, for example, “He called it ‘Esther’s Feast.’”
278	2:18	ufm8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	וַ⁠הֲנָחָ֤ה לַ⁠מְּדִינוֹת֙ עָשָׂ֔ה	1	This was probably a “tax holiday,” that is, a temporary elimination of taxes. For a time, the provinces did not have to send in the usual taxes to the king. You could say something like “he proclaimed a temporary reprieve from taxes for all the provinces of his empire.”
279	2:18	jd95		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Here, **hand** represents the action of doing or giving. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus personally gave lavish gifts to the guests at this feast. You could say something like “with royal generosity” or “with great willingness to give” or “with generosity that only a king can give.”
280	2:19	g38f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית	1	Since this happened some time after Esther’s Feast, you can show this by using a connecting phrase such as “some time later.”
281	2:19	p842		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית	1	The most likely explanation for this is that Ahasuerus decided he would like to have more concubines. you could say this explicitly if it will help the readers to understand the story. He probably believed that having a large number of concubines was another thing that would show he was a great king. To do so, you could add: “because Ahasuerus decided that he would like to have more concubines.”
282	2:19	abg2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “at the time when the king’s officers were gathering virgins for a second time.”
283	2:19	ang3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י	1	This indicates that the information about Mordecai explains what he was doing at this same time. You can use a phrase such as “during this time” to indicate this.
284	2:19	a23f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י יֹשֵׁ֥ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Possible meanings are: (1) **Sitting at the king’s gate** is an idiom meaning that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate. (2) Mordecai sat there so he could hear about how Esther was doing from the many people who passed through the gate.
285	2:19	i8in			בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Alternate translation: “the gate to the king’s house” or “the gate to the king’s palace”
286	2:20	abg5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	מֽוֹלַדְתָּ⁠הּ֙ וְ⁠אֶת־עַמָּ֔⁠הּ	1	These two short phrases mean almost the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that Esther followed Mordecai’s instructions exactly. You could combine them, as UST does. Alternate translation: “who her relatives were or that she was a Jew”
287	2:20	fb39			כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ מָרְדֳּכָ֑י	1	Alternate translation: “just as Mordecai had instructed her” or “as Mordecai had made her promise” or “because Mordecai had warned her not to tell anyone”
288	2:21	vi16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	בַּ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠הֵ֔ם	1	This resumes the story after the background information that is provided in verse 20. Indicate this in the way that your language resumes a story after giving background information, such as with a connecting phrase like “during that time.”
289	2:21	abg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י יֹשֵׁ֣ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	It is implicit in the story that Mordecai heard the two men talking who are named right afterwards. You can say this explicitly if it helps the readers to understand this part of the story. To do so, add: “he heard two men talking.”
290	2:21	abg8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	יֹשֵׁ֣ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	As in verse 19, this is likely an idiom that means that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate where officials met to make important decisions.
291	2:21	y2vl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בִּגְתָ֨ן וָ⁠תֶ֜רֶשׁ	1	These are the names of men.
292	2:21	abg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	שְׁנֵֽי־סָרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙	1	See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). For the phrase **of the king**, you can say “royal.”
293	2:21	abh0			מִ⁠שֹּׁמְרֵ֣י הַ⁠סַּ֔ף	1	In this case the men were not guardians of one of the harems but guardians of the king’s private rooms. You could say, “they guarded the doorway to the king’s private rooms” or “they protected the doorway to the king’s private quarters.”
294	2:21	abh1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יְבַקְשׁוּ֙	1	Here, **seeking** means actively trying to do something. Alternate translation: “they were plotting” or “they wanted to find a way”
295	2:21	jd97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד	1	Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing him. You could say, “they were planning to assassinate him.”
296	2:22	y7tv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּוָּדַ֤ע הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֔י	1	You can say this with an active form, for example by saying, “Mordecai found out what they were planning.”
297	2:22	abh2			וַ⁠יַּגֵּ֖ד לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה	1	This means that he told Queen Esther about it somehow.
298	2:22	dgp3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בְּ⁠שֵׁ֥ם מָרְדֳּכָֽי	1	This expression means that Esther passed the information along to King Ahasuerus on Mordecai’s behalf or that she told the king the information had come from Mordecai.
299	2:23	abh3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ	1	This verse tells what happened next after Esther gave the information to the king. You can use a word such as “then” to indicate this.
300	2:23	ld4y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “Then the king’s servants investigated Mordecai’s report and found out that it was true.”
301	2:23	abh4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the king ordered his servants to impale those two men on wooden poles” or “the king ordered his servants to hang those two men on a gallows”
302	2:23	y28j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	עֵ֑ץ	1	This seems to refer specifically to a pole or wooden structure that would be used to suspend a person above the ground and that could be used as a means of killing him or to display his body after he was dead. This might mean: (1) by hanging him from it with a rope tied around his neck, or (2) by impaling him on it, that is, by sticking a sharp point on one end of a pole through his body. Alternate translation: “wooden structure” or “wooden pole” or “gallows”
303	2:23	g9nh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֗ב	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. You can say, for example, “The king’s scribes recorded an account of this.”
304	2:23	abh5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בְּ⁠סֵ֛פֶר דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠יָּמִ֖ים	1	This is an idiom that describes a regular record of the events in a king’s reign. You could call this “the royal chronicles.” Alternate translation: “the daily record book”
305	2:23	abh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Here, **face** refers to the presence of a person. The phrase means that the scribes wrote this account while King Ahasuerus was personally present. You could say that they did this in the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “the king watched a scribe write this down”
306	3:intro	zb26				0	# Esther 3 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Haman plots against the Jews\n\nMordecai was told to prostrate himself before Haman. This would be considered to be worship. But for a Jew, it was wrong to worship someone other than Yahweh. Because of this, he refused to do it. This made Haman angry, so he decided to kill all the Jews in the Persian Empire. Haman was a descendant of Agag, a king of the Amalekite people. The Amalekites became the enemies of the Jews during the exodus (Exodus 17:8–16). Moses told the people that they would need to destroy them (Deuteronomy 25:17–19), and later God commanded Saul to destroy them (1 Samuel 15:2–3). Samuel killed King Agag (1 Samuel 15:33), but the Amalekites were never completely destroyed (1 Samuel 30:17). Both Mordecai and Haman were probably very aware that their people were enemies.
307	3:1	mm4c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	אַחַ֣ר ׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה	1	This introduces a new event in the story. Use a connecting phrase that introduces a new event in your language.
308	3:1	abh7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	אַחַ֣ר ׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה	1	This event happened some time after Esther became queen, and you can show this by using a connecting phrase such as “some time later.”
309	3:1	ir5v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הָמָ֧ן	1	This is a man’s name. It occurs many times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently.
310	3:1	abh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בֶּֽן־הַמְּדָ֛תָא הָ⁠אֲגָגִ֖י	1	These are the names of Haman’s father and Haman’s people group.
311	3:1	abh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	גִּדַּל֩ & אֲחַשְׁוֵר֜וֹשׁ אֶת־הָמָ֧ן	1	This means that Ahasuerus **promoted** Haman. It’s implied in the story that Haman was already one of Ahasuerus’s officials, but that he was now being promoted to a higher position. You could say that explicitly.
312	3:1	abi0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וַֽ⁠יְנַשְּׂאֵ֑⁠הוּ וַ⁠יָּ֨שֶׂם֙ אֶת־כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֕ל כָּל־הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that the king was making Haman very powerful. You could combine them and say something like, “the king gave Haman a very high position that was over all of his other officials.”
313	3:1	pl9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַֽ⁠יְנַשְּׂאֵ֑⁠הוּ	1	Here, **lifting** is a metaphor meaning to advance or promote a person to a higher, more important position than they held previously. Alternate translation: “he gave him a more important position”
314	3:1	ptm4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ	1	Here, **seat of authority** means Haman’s position or status in the Persian government.
315	3:1	abi1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **authority**, you can express the same idea with a concrete noun for this whole phrase. For example, you can say, “his position.”
316	3:1	abi2			מֵ⁠עַ֕ל כָּל־הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר אִתּֽ⁠וֹ	1	**Him** in this phrase may refer to the king. You could say that “the king promoted him above his other officials” or “gave him more authority than all of his other officials” or that “Haman became more important than all of his other officials.”
317	3:2	abi3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠כָל־עַבְדֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ	1	Here, the **gate of the king**, probably the entrance to the citadel, may represent the citadel itself, the place where these people served the king. The citadel, in turn, would represent everyone who served the king. So you could say just “all the king’s other servants.” However, this may also be a reference to the specific group of officials who were stationed at the gate, the way Mordecai was. Alternate translation: “the royal officials who were stationed at the palace gate”
318	3:2	abi4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠כָל־עַבְדֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ & כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ לְ⁠הָמָ֔ן	1	The servants were required to do this as a way of honoring him whenever Haman walked by. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly, as in the UST.
319	3:2	e25k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙	1	This means that the other officials humbled themselves and lay flat on the ground before Haman. These actions represented recognition and respect for the very high position that the king had given him in the Persian government.
320	3:2	abi5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the officials knew how important it was to obey the king’s command and honor Haman in this way. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “bow down all the way to the ground.” Alternate translation: “bowing and lying down on the ground”
321	3:2	fg8v			וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙	1	This means bowing down all the way to the ground.
322	3:2	jd99		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּי־כֵ֖ן צִוָּה־ל֣⁠וֹ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first in the verse because it explains the reason why all the other officials were bowing to Haman. See the UST.
323	3:2	abi6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כִּי־כֵ֖ן צִוָּה־ל֣⁠וֹ	1	The king did this as a sign of Haman’s new position. You can state this here or in a separate sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “the king had commanded them to do this in order to show that he had given Haman such a high position”
324	3:2	abi7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	וּ⁠מָ֨רְדֳּכַ֔י לֹ֥א יִכְרַ֖ע וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶֽה	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious an offense this was against the king’s command and how much determination it took for Mordecai to remain standing. You could combine these phrases as UST does and say, “But Mordecai refused to bow down to Haman.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai did not bow down or lie on the ground”
325	3:2	abi8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠מָ֨רְדֳּכַ֔י לֹ֥א יִכְרַ֖ע וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶֽה	1	It appears that as a Jew, Mordecai considered it wrong to worship anyone other than Yahweh, and that he believed he would be worshiping Haman if he bowed down low to the ground to honor him. So, on religious grounds, Mordecai refused to bow down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly.
326	3:3	abi9			עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ	1	See how you translated this expression at the beginning of [3:2](../03/02.md).
327	3:3	abj0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמְר֜וּ & לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י	1	They spoke to Mordecai because they saw that he did not bow down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. You could say, for example, “The other officials saw that, and they asked Mordecai.”
328	3:3	abj1			מַדּ֨וּעַ֙ אַתָּ֣ה עוֹבֵ֔ר אֵ֖ת מִצְוַ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Alternative translation: “why are you disobeying the king’s command” or “why are you not obeying what the king commanded”
329	3:4	jd3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ב⁠אמר⁠ם אֵלָי⁠ו֙	1	This means that they spoke to him about not bowing down. Specifically, they warned him that he would be severely punished if he kept disobeying the king and not honoring his highest official. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly.
330	3:4	jd1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	י֣וֹם וָ⁠י֔וֹם	1	This expression means “every day.”
331	3:4	abj2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וַ⁠יְהִ֗י ב⁠אמר⁠ם אֵלָי⁠ו֙ & וְ⁠לֹ֥א שָׁמַ֖ע אֲלֵי⁠הֶ֑ם	1	Here, **he did not listen** means he did not heed their warning or he did not do what they said. Mordecai heard them, but he did not do what they advised him to do. This means that even though the other officials questioned him and probably warned him, he still refused to bow down.
332	3:4	uek4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לְ⁠הָמָ֗ן לִ⁠רְאוֹת֙ הֲ⁠יַֽעַמְדוּ֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י מָרְדֳּכַ֔י	1	In this context, **standing** means to survive a challenge, and **words** means the reasons that Mordecai gave for his actions. This phrase means that the other officials told Haman about it to see if he would tolerate it.
333	3:4	abj3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥יד לָ⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־ה֥וּא יְהוּדִֽי	1	This is the answer that Mordecai gave the other officials when they asked him why he refused to bow down to Haman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put it first in the verse because it explains everything that happens afterwards. Alternate translation: “Mordecai told them that he was a Jew, and that Jews would bow down only to God”
334	3:4	abj4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥יד לָ⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־ה֥וּא יְהוּדִֽי	1	Mordecai’s explanation would have included the fact that Jews would only worship Yahweh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly.
335	3:5	abj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יַּ֣רְא הָמָ֔ן	1	Here, **seeing** means knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that Haman learned about this.
336	3:5	njt5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	אֵ֣ין מָרְדֳּכַ֔י כֹּרֵ֥עַ וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶ֖ה ל֑⁠וֹ	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious an offense this was. You could combine them as UST does and say, “Mordecai was refusing to bow down to him.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai would not bow down or lie on the ground”
337	3:5	wk8p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֥א הָמָ֖ן חֵמָֽה	1	Here, **Haman’s rage** is spoken of as something that could fill him up. You could say that he was furious or extremely angry.
338	3:6	k5h9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Haman considered that it was not enough”
339	3:6	abj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו	1	Haman probably decided to go to such extremes because he was so angry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly.
340	3:6	abj7			וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז	1	**Despise** in this context means not to hate but to think little of or think something is too small. This expression means that Haman decided it would not be enough just to kill Mordecai alone.
341	3:6	jd9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו	1	Here, **eyes** stand for “seeing,” and in this case “seeing” means judgment. This phrase means in Haman’s judgment. Alternate translation: “as he saw it”
342	3:6	abj8			לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֤ח יָד֙ בְּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֣י לְ⁠בַדּ֔⁠וֹ	1	Alternate translation: “he rejected the idea of killing only Mordecai” or “he decided to kill more than just Mordecai” or “he decided that it would not be enough to get rid of only Mordecai”
343	3:6	j11r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֤ח יָד֙	1	As in [2:21](../02/21.md), the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them.
344	3:6	abj9			כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥ידוּ ל֖⁠וֹ אֶת־עַ֣ם מָרְדֳּכָ֑י	1	**They** means the other royal officials. **Him** refers to Haman. **The people of Mordecai** means the Jews. Mordecai had told these officials that he would not bow down to Haman because Jews worshiped only God. So this means that the other officials had told Haman that Mordecai was not bowing down to him because he was a Jew.
345	3:6	hue9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יְבַקֵּ֣שׁ הָמָ֗ן לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֧יד	1	Here, **seeking** means trying to do something. In this context, it means that Haman decided that he would try to kill all the Jews.
346	3:6	abk0			בְּ⁠כָל־מַלְכ֥וּת אֲחַשְׁוֵר֖וֹשׁ	1	This means in the entire empire that King Ahasuerus ruled.
347	3:6	abk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֛ים & עַ֥ם מָרְדֳּכָֽי	1	These two phrases refer to the same group of people. The repetition emphasizes how great the threat was to their existence. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “all of the Jews.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai’s people, the Jews”
348	3:7	zl12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠חֹ֤דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁוֹן֙	1	Alternate translation: “In month one”
349	3:7	wyv6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths	הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֔ן	1	**Nisan** is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar.
350	3:7	abk2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	חֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֔ן	1	As in [2:16](../02/16.md), you could convert the Hebrew month into an approximate time on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the dates will be different every year and the translation will not be quite accurate. So you may just want to give the Hebrew month.
351	3:7	tw99		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בִּ⁠שְׁנַת֙ שְׁתֵּ֣ים עֶשְׂרֵ֔ה לַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ	1	Alternate translations: “during the twelfth year of the reign of Ahasuerus as king of Persia” or “when King Ahasuerus had reigned for about twelve years”
352	3:7	g4lt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ ה֨וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֜ל	1	The storyteller is giving both the Persian and the Hebrew name because this is the story behind the Festival of Purim, which takes its name from “Pur.” So this is not repetition for emphasis. You can put in the Persian name and the word for “lot” in your own language to show that the storyteller is doing this.
353	3:7	abk3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֜ל	1	A **lot** was an object with different markings on various sides that was used, most likely by dropping it on the ground, to select a specific time for doing something. The belief was that God or the gods would control which way the object fell, thus guiding the selection process and granting favor to the action if it were done on the date chosen.
354	3:7	abk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. You can say, for example, “Haman had his servants cast a Pur.”
355	3:7	abk5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first because it explains the rest of what happens in this verse.
356	3:7	j13r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הָמָ֗ן	1	Here, **face** represents the presence of a person. In this context, the phrase means that Haman was physically present when the lot was cast. Alternate translation: “as Haman watched”
357	3:7	j15r			מִ⁠יּ֧וֹם ׀ לְ⁠י֛וֹם וּ⁠מֵ⁠חֹ֛דֶשׁ לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ	1	This expression means that the lot was cast to select a particular day of the month and a particular month of the year.
358	3:7	j17r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	מִ⁠יּ֧וֹם ׀ לְ⁠י֛וֹם וּ⁠מֵ⁠חֹ֛דֶשׁ לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ	1	Haman was casting the lot to determine the best day and the best month to kill the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to determine the best day and the best month to kill the Jews”
359	3:7	ih4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths	שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר	1	**Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. This name occurs several times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently.
360	3:7	abk6			שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר	1	See how you decided in [2:16](../02/16.md) and the first part of this verse to represent the dates that are given in the Hebrew calendar in the book of Esther. Be consistent.
361	3:7	abk7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר	1	This means that the lot indicated the twelfth month of that year as the time for Haman to carry out his plan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (The day that was chosen is reported in verse 13.) Alternate translation: “the lot indicated the twelfth month, the month of Adar, as the best month to kill the Jews”
362	3:7	k3vd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר	1	Alternative translation: “month twelve” or “the twelfth month”
363	3:8	abk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הָמָן֙ לַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ	1	The implication is that Haman then went to see the king so that he could speak with him. You could say that explicitly. Do not give your readers the impression that the king was present with Haman while he was casting the lot.
364	3:8	aig9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	יֶשְׁנ֣⁠וֹ עַם־אֶחָ֗ד	1	**He** refers to the king, and **one people** refers to the Jews as a people group. So this means there is a people group or a group of people.
365	3:8	p4a8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	מְפֻזָּ֤ר וּ⁠מְפֹרָד֙	1	These two words mean almost the same thing. Haman uses the repetition to emphasize that the Jews are everywhere throughout the empire and so their influence, which he says is bad, will affect everyone. You could combine these words as UST does.
366	3:8	abk9			בֵּ֣ין הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֔ים בְּ⁠כֹ֖ל מְדִינ֣וֹת מַלְכוּתֶ֑⁠ךָ	1	Haman is saying that the Jews are mixed in with all the other peoples, and they live in every province.
367	3:8	abl0			וְ⁠דָתֵי⁠הֶ֞ם שֹׁנ֣וֹת מִ⁠כָּל־עָ֗ם וְ⁠אֶת־דָּתֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ אֵינָ֣⁠ם עֹשִׂ֔ים	1	Haman is saying that the Jews have their own set of laws, and he is accusing them of not obeying the king’s laws as a result.
368	3:8	r34x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	דָּתֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙	1	Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You could have him say, “your laws.” Or you could indicate this respect another way by having Haman begin by saying, “Your Majesty.”
369	3:8	bf9g			וְ⁠לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֵין־שֹׁוֶ֖ה לְ⁠הַנִּיחָֽ⁠ם	1	Haman is saying, “It is not good for you to allow them to live in your empire.” This can also be stated without the negative. Alternate translation: “the king should remove them” or “you should remove them”
370	3:8	j19r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	וְ⁠לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ	1	Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person by saying, “not good for you.”
371	3:9	abl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב	1	Haman speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect.
372	3:9	abl2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב	1	See how you decided to translate this idiom in [1:19](../01/19.md). Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king” or “if the king thinks this is a good idea” or “if this advice is pleasing to the king”
373	3:9	abl3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	יִכָּתֵ֖ב	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who would do the action. For example, you could say, “the king could write a decree” or “you could write a decree.”
374	3:9	abl4			לְ⁠אַבְּדָ֑⁠ם	1	This means that the decree would say that all the Jews should be killed.
375	3:9	eh3w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אֶשְׁקוֹל֙ עַל־יְדֵי֙ עֹשֵׂ֣י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֔ה	1	This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) Haman could mean that the king’s men will be able to collect a huge amount of money from the plunder that they would get from the Jews. Referring to the weight would be a way of saying, “I guarantee that it will be at least that much.” This reasoning agrees with 3:13, where the king’s letter specifies that those who kill the Jews can take their plunder. Alternate translation: “we will get so much plunder that the officers you send will be able to bring back” (Also see UST) (2) “**Weigh out into the hands**” could be an idiom that means Haman himself will pay the officers who will put the plan into effect. Haman will not do this personally, but it means that he will take responsibility for paying them from his own resources. Alternate translation: “From my own resources I will pay … to the men who do the work”
376	3:9	lhv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	וַ⁠עֲשֶׂ֨רֶת אֲלָפִ֜ים כִּכַּר־כֶּ֗סֶף	1	This would be worth over $300 million at current prices today. But since prices vary over time, if you expressed the value in modern measurements, that could cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate. Instead you could express the amount using the ancient measurement, the talent, and explain in a note that a talent was equivalent to about 30 kilograms. Alternatively, you could specify the weight of the silver in the text, as UST does in metric tons.
377	3:9	vm59		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	וַ⁠עֲשֶׂ֨רֶת אֲלָפִ֜ים כִּכַּר־כֶּ֗סֶף	1	The **talent** was the largest unit of money and **10,000** was the largest number in the counting system of the time. It is possible that Haman used these terms to represent a very large, but not precise, amount. Alternate translation: “a huge amount of silver” or “enormous amounts of silver”
378	3:9	abl5			עֹשֵׂ֣י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֔ה	1	This could mean: (1) those who work for the king in general (administrators) or (2) more specifically the officers whom Ahasuerus would send around the empire to organize the killing of the Jews.
379	3:9	abl7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	גִּנְזֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Haman speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You could also have him speak of “your royal treasuries.”
380	3:10	abl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יָּ֧סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל יָד֑⁠וֹ וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֗⁠הּ לְ⁠הָמָ֧ן	1	The implication is that Ahasuerus thought that Haman’s suggestion was a good idea and he agreed to it. You could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king agreed that this was a good idea, so”
381	3:10	abl9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠יָּ֧סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל יָד֑⁠וֹ וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֗⁠הּ לְ⁠הָמָ֧ן	1	**Giving the ring to Haman** showed that Haman could act on the king’s own authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king gave Haman the power to act on his authority to carry out the plan. To show that, he gave Haman the ring he wore that had his official seal on it”
382	3:10	c9md		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ	1	This was a special ring that could be used to imprint the king’s official seal on a law or decree. This ring had the king’s name or mark on it. When he put a wax seal on important papers, he would press the mark onto the seal. If a paper had this mark on its seal, people would know that what was written on the paper was written with the king’s authority and had to be obeyed. You could describe this as “the ring he wore that had his official seal on it.”
383	3:10	abm0			בֶּֽן־הַמְּדָ֛תָא הָ⁠אֲגָגִ֖י	1	This information about Haman’s identity is repeated to stress that the king giving him the signet ring was an official legal act that transferred power to him. (In the same way, legal documents today often use a person’s full name and other identifying information.) If you repeat this information in your own translation, your readers should see this significance.
384	3:10	abm1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	צֹרֵ֥ר הַ⁠יְּהוּדִֽים	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. It means that he had become “the enemy of the Jews.”
385	3:11	sz4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	הַ⁠כֶּ֖סֶף נָת֣וּן לָ֑⁠ךְ	1	You can say this with an active form. This could mean one of the following things: (1) “You can keep the money from plundering the Jews for yourself.” (2) “I give you permission to take the money from the Jews and to give it to the men just as you have said.” (3) “You do not need to pay for the expenses of the plan yourself.” (4) This statement by the king may also be a formal and cultural way of expressing gratitude for the promised money without actually releasing Haman from paying the money into the treasury.
386	3:11	abm2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠הָ⁠עָ֕ם לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת בּ֖⁠וֹ כַּ⁠טּ֥וֹב בְּ⁠עֵינֶֽי⁠ךָ	1	Here, **eyes** represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The king is telling Haman that **he can do whatever he wants to the Jews**. Alternate translation: “you can do to the Jews as you see fit”
387	3:12	hx6c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּקָּרְאוּ֩ סֹפְרֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ	1	You can say this with an active form. You can also say who did the action. It was most likely Haman, since the king had given him authority to act on his behalf. So you could say, “Haman called in the royal scribes.” Alternate translation: “the king summoned his scribes”
388	3:12	t6qa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths	בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֣ר יוֹם֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒	1	You can add “of that same year” to show that Haman did this right after Ahasuerus agreed to his plan. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the first month”
389	3:12	abm3			בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֣ר יוֹם֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒	1	You can put this information first because it places the event within the timeline of the story.
390	3:12	abm4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֣ב כְּֽ⁠כָל־אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֣ה הָמָ֡ן	1	You can say this with an active form. You can also say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and Haman dictated a letter to them” or “they wrote a decree containing all that Haman had commanded”
391	3:12	abm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנֵֽי־הַ֠⁠מֶּלֶךְ	1	This seems to mean the officials of the king who served in the palace in the capital city, since they are distinguished from the provincial governors and the leaders of the people groups.
392	3:12	j23r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֗ה	1	This expression means every province**.** See how you translated this in 1:22.
393	3:12	abm7			שָׂ֤רֵי עַם֙ וָ⁠עָ֔ם	1	Alternate translation: “the leaders of each people group”
394	3:12	j25r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	עַם֙ וָ⁠עָ֔ם	1	This expression means every people group**.** See how you translated this in [1:22](../01/22.md).
395	3:12	j27r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ	1	See how you translated this in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “to each province using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script”
396	3:12	abm8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ	1	The implication is that the scribes translated the letter and sent it to each province using its own alphabet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly.
397	3:12	j31r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ	1	See how you translated this expression in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “and to each people group in its own language”
398	3:12	j33r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ	1	Here, **tongue** is a metonym meaning the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “according to its language”
399	3:12	abm9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בְּ⁠שֵׁ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֹשׁ֙ נִכְתָּ֔ב	1	There are two This could mean: (1) Here, **name** could mean the authority of the king. This would be saying that Haman’s letter had the same authority as it would have had if the king had sent it himself. Alternate translation: “Haman sent the letter under the king’s own authority” (2) However, this could also mean that Haman actually had the scribes sign the king’s name to the letter. Alternate translation: “they signed the king’s name at the end of the letters”
400	3:12	lyf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	נִכְתָּ֔ב וְ⁠נֶחְתָּ֖ם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֥עַת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “to show that he was sending the letter under the king’s own authority, Haman sealed each copy of the letter with the ring that had the king’s official seal on it,” or “the scribes signed the king’s name at the end of the letters. Then they sealed the letters with wax, and stamped the wax by using the king’s ring”
401	3:13	hxx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִשְׁל֨וֹחַ סְפָרִ֜ים	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “couriers delivered the letters.”
402	3:13	j34r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בְּ⁠יַ֣ד הָ⁠רָצִים֮	1	Here, **hand** could mean two different things: (1) It could literally mean “hand,” meaning that the couriers carried the letters in their hands. Alternate translation: “couriers hand-delivered the documents” (2) “Hand” could also be a metaphor for power, control, or authority, meaning that couriers were the ones who delivered the letters to all the provinces throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “couriers gave the documents directly”
403	3:13	abn0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	אֶל־כָּל־מְדִינ֣וֹת הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒	1	Haman did not send the letters to the provinces (the geographical territories) themselves. Rather, he sent them to the officials in every province in the empire. The story is using the word “province” to refer to these officials by something associated with them, the territories they ruled. Your translation should make clear that the letters were sent to people, not places.
404	3:13	xs6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֡יד לַ⁠הֲרֹ֣ג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֣ד	1	These words mean the same thing. They are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction that is envisioned. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “completely destroy.” (A “doublet” can use more than two words.
405	3:13	abn1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	מִ⁠נַּ֨עַר וְ⁠עַד־זָקֵ֜ן	1	This is a figure of speech that describes all of something by naming two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between. You could express its meaning as UST does and say something like “every single one of them.” Alternate translation: “including young people and old people”
406	3:13	abn2			טַ֤ף וְ⁠נָשִׁים֙	1	Alternate translation: “including the children and the women”
407	3:13	j35r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אֶחָ֔ד	1	Alternate translation: “on a single day”
408	3:13	abn3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר	1	Implicitly, this means “the thirteenth day of the twelfth month of that same year.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly.
409	3:13	g5br		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר	1	Alternate translation: “on day thirteen”
410	3:13	j36r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר	1	Alternate translation: “of month twelve”
411	3:13	i5ur		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths	הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֑ר	1	This is the name of the twelfth month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you decided in 2:16 and 3:7 to express dates that the story gives according to the Hebrew calendar.
412	3:13	pbp1			וּ⁠שְׁלָלָ֖⁠ם לָ⁠בֽוֹז	1	This means that the letters also said that those who killed the Jews could take everything that belonged to them.
413	3:14	tj7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב לְ⁠הִנָּ֤תֵֽן דָּת֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה	1	You can say this with an active form. For example, you can say, “The officials in every province presented a copy of the letter as the law.”
414	3:14	vga2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה	1	This expression means each and every province. See how you translated the term “province” in 1:1.
415	3:14	l9w7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב & גָּל֖וּי לְ⁠כָל־הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֑ים	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials to post copies where everyone could see them” or “the king commanded the officials to display copies of these letters where all the people could see them”
416	3:14	f6dc			לִ⁠הְי֥וֹת עֲתִדִ֖ים לַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1	Alternate translations: “so that people would be ready to do on that day what the king had written in the letter” or “so that they would get ready to do what the letter said to do when the day came”
417	3:15	abn4			הָֽ⁠רָצִ֞ים יָצְא֤וּ דְחוּפִים֙ בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	This means that the king had commanded the couriers to deliver the letters as quickly as possible.
418	3:15	abn5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הָֽ⁠רָצִ֞ים יָצְא֤וּ דְחוּפִים֙ בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	You can state explicitly where the couriers brought the letters. Alternate translation: “as the king had commanded, couriers rushed the letters to every province in the empire” or “then, according to what the king commanded, men riding horses took these letters quickly to every province in the empire”
419	3:15	i12c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠הַ⁠דָּ֥ת נִתְּנָ֖ה	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “People read the letter out loud”
420	3:15	nlk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֑ה	1	Here this likely means in the “capital city of Susa.”
421	3:15	abn6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	יָשְׁב֣וּ לִ⁠שְׁתּ֔וֹת	1	(1) This could mean that Ahasuerus and Haman had more than just a drink together. This could be a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. They may have celebrated with an entire banquet that is being described here by reference to one part of it, the drinks. Alternate translation: “had a celebration feast together” (2) Another possibility is that this is describing a toast that Ahasuerus and Haman shared to celebrate their plan. “Sat down” would simply be describing how the men would have reclined at a table to drink. Alternate translation: “had a celebration toast”
422	3:15	wm4u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	נָבֽוֹכָה	1	The implication is that the people in Susa were very upset about what was going to happen and they did not know what to do about it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly.
423	3:15	wbgv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֥יר	1	The author wants us to see the contrast between the king and Haman sitting down to relax and drink and the people in the city agitated and in an uproar over what the king and Haman had proclaimed. Use a connecting word or other way that your language uses to show a contrast.
424	3:15	abn7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֥יר שׁוּשָׁ֖ן	1	This does not mean the city itself, but the people who live there. This is a figure of speech in which something is called not by its own name, but by the name of something closely associated with it. So this means “everyone who lived in Susa” or the people in Susa
425	3:15	abn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	נָבֽוֹכָה	1	You can translate the abstract noun **confusion** with a verbal phrase such as “was very confused.”
426	4:intro	z7u2				0	# Esther 4 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Mordecai warns Esther to act\n\nMordecai tells Esther she must beg the king for the Jews’ lives even if she risks her own death.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Implicit information\n\nThere is implicit information that translators may not understand. The sentence, “Who knows whether you have come to this royal position for such a time as this?” means “maybe God made you the queen so you could save the Jews.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
427	4:1	j37r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֗י יָדַע֙	1	Here the story re-introduces Mordecai as the main character in focus. Alternate translation: “when Mordecai found out”
428	4:1	nya6			כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר נַעֲשָׂ֔ה	1	Alternate translation: “about Haman’s plan to kill all the Jews” or “about those letters”
429	4:1	vgy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠יִּקְרַ֤ע מָרְדֳּכַי֙ אֶת־בְּגָדָ֔י⁠ו וַ⁠יִּלְבַּ֥שׁ שַׂ֖ק וָ⁠אֵ֑פֶר	1	These actions demonstrate extreme sadness.
430	4:1	abn9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יִּקְרַ֤ע מָרְדֳּכַי֙ אֶת־בְּגָדָ֔י⁠ו וַ⁠יִּלְבַּ֥שׁ שַׂ֖ק וָ⁠אֵ֑פֶר	1	You can explain why Mordecai did this. Alternate translation: “he was so anguished that he tore his clothes and put on rough sackcloth and threw ashes over himself”
431	4:1	abo0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֵּצֵא֙ בְּ⁠ת֣וֹךְ הָ⁠עִ֔יר	1	The next verse shows that Mordecai was heading towards the king’s palace. You could say that explicitly here. Mordecai might have wanted to call attention to the danger that the Jews were in by going to a public location where people were used to seeing him. Or he might have wanted to contact Esther and ask her to help with the trouble. Or he might have wanted both. Alternate translation: “he started walking towards the city center, towards the king’s palace”
432	4:1	abo1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וַ⁠יִּזְעַ֛ק זְעָקָ֥ה גְדֹלָ֖ה וּ⁠מָרָֽה	1	**Great** and **bitter** are two words that refer to the same thing and that work together. They indicate that Mordecai’s cry was so loud because it was so anguished. Alternate translation: “cried out in anguish”
433	4:2	abo2			וַ⁠יָּב֕וֹא	1	**He** means Mordecai. Alternate translation: “Mordecai came”
434	4:2	j38r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	עַ֖ד לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	Here, **face** represents the front of an object. The phrase means that Mordecai could not come inside the gate to the king’s palace, but had to wait just outside of it.
435	4:2	abo3			שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	See how you translated this in [2:19](../02/19.md). Alternate translation: “the gate to the king’s palace”
436	4:2	abo4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	אֵ֥ין לָ⁠ב֛וֹא אֶל־שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ בִּ⁠לְב֥וּשׁ שָֽׂק	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first in the verse because it explains why Mordecai waited outside. See the UST. Alternate translation: “But no one who was wearing sackcloth was allowed inside the palace gates”
437	4:3	e73y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֗ה	1	This expression means in every single province. See how you translated the term “province” in 1:1. Alternate translation: “in each and every province” or “in every province of the empire”
438	4:3	abo5			מְקוֹם֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙ מַגִּ֔יעַ	1	Alternate translation: “anywhere that the letter that said to destroy the Jews was announced in public”
439	4:3	abo6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙	1	These two phrases are referring to the same thing, that is, the information that the letter conveyed. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious a situation this was. Alternate translation: “the letter from the king” or “the law that said to destroy the Jews”
440	4:3	e7zx			אֵ֤בֶל גָּדוֹל֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים	1	Alternate translation: “the Jews mourned greatly” or “when the Jews heard about it, they mourned greatly”
441	4:3	abo7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠צ֥וֹם	1	**Fasting** is a sign of mourning. If your readers would not understand this, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “they went without food because they were so upset”
442	4:3	abo8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וּ⁠בְכִ֖י וּ⁠מִסְפֵּ֑ד	1	These two words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how distressed the Jews were. Alternate translation: “wailed loudly”
443	4:3	djf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	שַׂ֣ק וָ⁠אֵ֔פֶר יֻצַּ֖ע לָֽ⁠רַבִּֽים	1	These were actions that demonstrated deep grief. “Many of them lay on the ground, dressed in sackcloth and sitting in ashes”
444	4:4	q7ll			נַעֲר֨וֹת אֶסְתֵּ֤ר	1	Alternate translation: “Esther’s female servants” of “Esther’s maids”
445	4:4	abo9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	וְ⁠סָרִיסֶ֨י⁠הָ֙	1	See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “her male servants” or “her other officials”
446	4:4	abp0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לָ֔⁠הּ	1	That is, they told her that Mordecai was sitting outside the gate wearing sackcloth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as in the UST.
447	4:4	abp1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠תִּתְחַלְחַ֥ל הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה מְאֹ֑ד	1	**The queen** means Esther. You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Esther herself became very afraid” or “this made the queen very distressed”
448	4:4	abp2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠תִּתְחַלְחַ֥ל הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה מְאֹ֑ד	1	The implication is that this happened when she heard what Mordecai was doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When she heard about this, Esther herself became very afraid”
449	4:4	y8bc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠תִּשְׁלַ֨ח בְּגָדִ֜ים לְ⁠הַלְבִּ֣ישׁ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֗י	1	**She** means Esther. This was her way of encouraging Mordecai to be hopeful and act publicly as if whatever situation he was worried about were not completely desperate. Alternate translation: “she sent servants to take to Mordecai some good clothes to wear”
450	4:4	abp3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וְ⁠לֹ֥א קִבֵּֽל	1	This was Mordecai’s way of replying to Esther that the situation truly was desperate. Alternate translation: “he refused to put them on”
451	4:5	abp4			וַ⁠תִּקְרָא֩ אֶסְתֵּ֨ר לַ⁠הֲתָ֜ךְ מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙	1	Alternative translation: “then Esther summoned Hathak, one of the king’s officials”
452	4:5	vf4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	לַ⁠הֲתָ֜ךְ	1	This is a man’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter. Be sure to translate it consistently.
453	4:5	lp8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶעֱמִ֣יד לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠הָ	1	Alternate translation: “who was one of the royal guardians whom the king had assigned to serve Esther personally” You can put this information first because it provides background information.
454	4:5	icg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י	1	See how you translated this term **eunuch** in [1:10](../01/10.md).
455	4:5	j39r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠הָ	1	Here, **face** represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that the guardians served Esther personally.
456	4:5	abp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	לָ⁠דַ֥עַת מַה־זֶּ֖ה וְ⁠עַל־מַה־זֶּֽה	1	These two phrases mean similar things. In both cases, “this” refers to what Mordecai was doing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Esther now knew there must be a very serious reason why Mordecai was wearing sackcloth in such a public place. Alternate translation: “to find out why he was so distressed that he was sitting at the palace gate wearing sackcloth”
457	4:6	abp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֥א הֲתָ֖ךְ אֶֽל־מָרְדֳּכָ֑י	1	Hathak went out specifically to speak with Mordecai and find out why he was so distressed, as Esther had asked him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Hathak went out to speak with Mordecai”
458	4:6	mgl5			רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר	1	Alternate translation: “the central plaza”
459	4:6	j41r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י	1	Here, **face** represents the front of an object. The phrase means that the open square was in front of the palace gate.
460	4:6	abp8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	The citadel is being described by reference to something associated with it, the gate that leads into it. Alternate translation: “the citadel gate”
461	4:7	zq3s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	אֵ֖ת כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר קָרָ֑⁠הוּ	1	Here, **him** refers to Mordecai, but here Mordecai represents the entire group of which he is a member. Alternate translation: “everything that Haman was planning to do to the Jews”
462	4:7	abp9			פָּרָשַׁ֣ת הַ⁠כֶּ֗סֶף אֲשֶׁ֨ר אָמַ֤ר הָמָן֙ לִ֠⁠שְׁקוֹל עַל־גִּנְזֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ בַּיְּהוּדִ֖ים לְ⁠אַבְּדָֽ⁠ם	1	This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) the amount of silver that Haman said the king would get for his treasury from the plunder that the people who destroyed the Jews would take from them, or (2) the amount of silver that Haman had said he would contribute to pay for the expenses of the plan to destroy the Jews. You could say either one as an alternate translation, but it should agree with your interpretation of [3:9](../03/09.md).
463	4:8	j43r			פַּתְשֶׁ֣גֶן כְּתָֽב־הַ֠⁠דָּת	1	Alternate translation: “a copy of the letter that Haman had sent out” or “a copy of the decree”
464	4:8	zt49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	הַ֠⁠דָּת אֲשֶׁר־נִתַּ֨ן בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֤ן	1	If it would help your readers to understand, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the law that the heralds had read out loud in Susa” or “the decree that the king’s servants had posted in Susa”
465	4:8	abq0			לְ⁠הַשְׁמִידָ⁠ם֙	1	Alternative translation: “that said that all the Jews must be killed”
466	4:8	abq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	לְ⁠הַרְא֥וֹת אֶת־אֶסְתֵּ֖ר וּ⁠לְ⁠הַגִּ֣יד לָ֑⁠הּ	1	These two phrases mean similar things. They are repeated to emphasize how important Mordecai knew it was for Esther to understand just what Haman was planning. “so that Esther could see exactly what it said.”
467	4:8	abq2			וּ⁠לְ⁠צַוּ֣וֹת עָלֶ֗י⁠הָ	1	Alternate translation: “and to urge her”
468	4:8	gds6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	לְ⁠הִֽתְחַנֶּן־ל֛⁠וֹ וּ⁠לְ⁠בַקֵּ֥שׁ	1	These two phrases mean similar things. They are repeated to emphasize the force of the action that Mordecai felt was needed. Alternate translation: “to plead with him”
469	4:8	j47r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו	1	Here, **face** represents the presence of a person. In this context, the phrase means that Esther should go into the presence of the king to ask personally for the king’s intervention. Alternate translation: “to go to the king personally”
470	4:8	abq3			עַל־עַמָּֽ⁠הּ	1	Alternate translation: “to act mercifully toward her people”
471	4:10	abq5			וַ⁠תֹּ֤אמֶר אֶסְתֵּר֙ לַ⁠הֲתָ֔ךְ וַ⁠תְּצַוֵּ֖⁠הוּ אֶֽל־מָרְדֳּכָֽי	1	Alternate translation: “then Esther told Hathak to go back to Mordecai and tell him this”
472	4:11	abq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	כָּל־עַבְדֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ וְ⁠עַם־מְדִינ֨וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ יֽוֹדְעִ֗ים	1	**All the servants of the king** refers to the royal officials in the palace. **The people of the provinces** refers to those living out in the empire. So this phrase means something like “those both near and far.” Esther is using a figure of speech to refer to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between those parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like, “everyone in the whole empire knows.” Alternate translation: “all the king’s officials and all the people in the empire know this law”
473	4:11	abq7			כָּל־עַבְדֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ וְ⁠עַם־מְדִינ֨וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ יֽוֹדְעִ֗ים	1	Esther says this to show that there is no uncertainty about this being the law. You can put this information after the description of the law itself, If it would be helpful in your language, so that it can serve to emphasize how definite the law is that was just described.
474	4:11	d9mh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	כָּל־אִ֣ישׁ וְ⁠אִשָּׁ֡ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר	1	Here, Esther once again refers to a group by describing two parts of it. She means all of the people whom Ahasuerus rules as king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like “anyone”.
475	4:11	abq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	יָבֽוֹא־אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֩ אֶל־הֶ⁠חָצֵ֨ר הַ⁠פְּנִימִ֜ית	1	As [5:1](../05/01.md) makes clear, this refers to a courtyard right outside the room where King Ahasuerus sat on his throne. He could see out of the entrance to the room into the courtyard and tell if anyone came and stood there. Anyone who did that was asking to speak to the king. Alternate translation: “who goes into the inner courtyard of the palace, where the king can see them”
476	4:11	abq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־יִקָּרֵ֗א	1	If it would help your readers to understand, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “when the king has not summoned that person”
477	4:11	abr0			אַחַ֤ת דָּת⁠וֹ֙	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this after the explanation of the law itself. Alternate translation: “this law applies to everyone in the kingdom”
478	4:11	abr1			לְ⁠הָמִ֔ית	1	Alternate translation: “that person must be executed” or “the guards will kill that person”
479	4:11	abr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	לְ֠⁠בַד מֵ⁠אֲשֶׁ֨ר יֽוֹשִׁיט־ל֥⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֥יט הַ⁠זָּהָ֖ב	1	If the king pointed his scepter toward a person, that meant that the king was accepting him. Alternate translation: “unless the king extends his golden scepter towards him”
480	4:11	abr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	שַׁרְבִ֥יט הַ⁠זָּהָ֖ב	1	A scepter was an ornamental staff or wand that rulers carried or held as a symbol of their authority. According to this, the scepter of King Ahasuerus was made of gold. Alternate translation: “golden scepter”
481	4:11	ilp4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠חָיָ֑ה	1	This means that the guards will not kill this person and he can proceed to speak to the king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “then the guards will not kill him and he can speak to the king”
482	4:11	abr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י לֹ֤א נִקְרֵ֨אתי֙ לָ⁠ב֣וֹא אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם	1	Esther is saying by implication that she cannot speak to the king as Mordecai has requested because the king has not been calling for her, which would have given her an opportunity to speak to him. If she goes without being summoned, she could be put to death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly, as in the UST.
483	4:11	j49r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י	1	This expression indicates a contrast between Esther’s present situation and the situation she has just described.
484	4:11	abr5			זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם	1	The phrase means that Esther has not been called in the king’s presence for a period of at least 30 days. You could use an equivalent expression in your language that would indicate this is a long enough time that Esther has reason to believe the king is not interested in seeing her. Alternate translation: “in over a month”
485	4:11	gv1v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם	1	Alternate translation: “thirty days”
486	4:12	abr6			וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֔י	1	From this point on, the author focuses only on Mordecai and Esther and does not specify who the messenger is. You can use a general phrase such as, “they told Mordecai” or “Mordecai was told” or “messengers told Mordecai.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could continue to specify that the messenger was Hathak. The UST models a way to do that.
487	4:13	abr7			וַ⁠יֹּ֥אמֶר מָרְדֳּכַ֖י לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶל־אֶסְתֵּ֑ר	1	Alternate translation: “then Mordecai sent back this message to Esther”
488	4:14	i1uy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	רֶ֣וַח וְ⁠הַצָּלָ֞ה יַעֲמ֤וֹד לַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ מִ⁠מָּק֣וֹם אַחֵ֔ר	1	Here, **relief** and **deliverance** are spoken of as if they are living things that can rise up. Alternate translation: “someone else will rise up from another place and rescue the Jews”
489	4:14	t3k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	רֶ֣וַח וְ⁠הַצָּלָ֞ה	1	Here, **relief** and **deliverance** mean very similar things. They are used together to emphasize the great emotion behind being delivered from this great evil. If it works better in your language, you can use one word instead of two, as in the UST.
490	4:14	abs0			וְ⁠אַ֥תְּ וּ⁠בֵית־אָבִ֖י⁠ךְ תֹּאבֵ֑דוּ	1	The implication is that the Jews will be rescued starting in that other place, but the ones living in Susa will still be in danger because no one who could have helped them there (such as Esther) would have done anything. Alternate translation: “you and your relatives will be killed”
491	4:14	dtg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	וּ⁠מִ֣י יוֹדֵ֔עַ אִם־לְ⁠עֵ֣ת כָּ⁠זֹ֔את הִגַּ֖עַתְּ לַ⁠מַּלְכֽוּת	1	This is really a statement, and it is about what is happening right then. Mordecai asks it in question form so that Esther will think deeply about her role in this situation. Alternate translation: “who knows, perhaps it was to intervene in this very situation that you became queen”
492	4:16	d6cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֜ים הַֽ⁠נִּמְצְאִ֣ים בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן	1	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all the Jews who live here in Susa”
493	4:16	t2wg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וְ⁠צ֣וּמוּ עָ֠לַ⁠י	1	The verb **fast** here is plural, including Mordecai and all of the Jews. Fasting (that is, going without eating) was a symbolic act that the Jews did when they were praying intensely. You could make the connection with prayer explicit. Alternate translation: “fast and pray for me”
494	4:16	qw8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	וְ⁠אַל־תֹּאכְל֨וּ וְ⁠אַל־תִּשְׁתּ֜וּ שְׁלֹ֤שֶׁת יָמִים֙ לַ֣יְלָה וָ⁠י֔וֹם	1	This expression means that Esther was asking the Jews in Susa not to eat or drink anything during the day or the night for a period of three days. Alternate translation: “tell them to not eat or drink anything for three days and three nights”
495	4:16	j51r			גַּם־אֲנִ֥י וְ⁠נַעֲרֹתַ֖⁠י אָצ֣וּם כֵּ֑ן	1	Alternate translation: “my maids and I will also fast”
496	4:16	abs2			וּ⁠בְ⁠כֵ֞ן	1	Alternate translation: “after we have all done that, and while still fasting”
497	4:16	abs3			אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־כַ⁠דָּ֔ת	1	Alternate translation: “even though there is a law against going without being summoned”
498	4:16	abs4			וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר אָבַ֖דְתִּי אָבָֽדְתִּי	1	Alternate translation: “then if they kill me, they kill me”
499	4:17	abs5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַֽ⁠יַּעֲבֹ֖ר מָרְדֳּכָ֑י	1	The implication is that Mordecai did this after Hathak brought Esther’s reply back to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so after Hathak told this to Mordecai, he went”
500	4:17	abs6			כְּ⁠כֹ֛ל אֲשֶׁר־צִוְּתָ֥ה עָלָ֖י⁠ו אֶסְתֵּֽר	1	Alternate translation: “everything that Esther had told him to do”
501	5:intro	k5ff				0	# Esther 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter begins a section about Haman’s fall (Chapters 5–7).\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Esther’s respect\n\nEsther approached the king with the utmost of respect. By doing this, her character became respected by the king. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
502	5:1	j53r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֣י ׀ בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֗י	1	This introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “three days later” or “when Esther had been fasting for three days”
503	5:1	abs7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וַ⁠תִּלְבַּ֤שׁ אֶסְתֵּר֙ מַלְכ֔וּת	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **royalty**, you can express the same idea with an adjective and a concrete noun. Alternate translation: “Esther put on the robes that showed that she was the queen”
504	5:1	abs8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠תִּלְבַּ֤שׁ אֶסְתֵּר֙ מַלְכ֔וּת	1	It is clear from the story that before she went to see the king, Esther got a banquet ready so that she could invite him and Haman to come to it right away. If it is confusing to leave that out, you can explain that here. Alternate translation, add: “Esther prepared a grand banquet and then put on her royal robes”
505	5:1	abs9			בַּ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠פְּנִימִ֔ית	1	See how you translated this in [4:11](../04/11.md). Alternate translation: “the inner courtyard of the palace”
506	5:1	uk7p			נֹ֖כַח בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	Alternate translation: “across from the room where the king was”
507	5:1	abt0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וְ֠⁠הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ יוֹשֵׁ֞ב עַל־כִּסֵּ֤א מַלְכוּת⁠וֹ֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת	1	**Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to those things that belonged only to the king. You can translate this idea with a verb, “the throne he ruled from” and “the palace where he reigned,” or with an adjective, “his royal throne” and “his royal palace.” Alternate translation: “in the throne room of the palace, sitting on the king’s throne”
508	5:1	j55r			נֹ֖כַח פֶּ֥תַח הַ⁠בָּֽיִת	1	Alternate translation: “facing the entrance of the room”
509	5:2	abt1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	וַ⁠יְהִי֩	1	This expression introduces what happened next. Alternate translation: “Now” or “and”
510	5:2	abt2			כִ⁠רְא֨וֹת	1	Alternate translation: “when … noticed”
511	5:2	j57r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	נָשְׂאָ֥ה חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו	1	See how you translated similar expressions in 2:9, 2:15, and 2:17. Review the explanations there if that would be helpful. In this context, it probably means that King Ahasuerus **thought Esther looked very attractive** as she stood in the court. It could also mean that King Ahasuerus was very pleased to see her. It could mean both. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased to see her” or “he approved of her”
512	5:2	pw4x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	נָשְׂאָ֥ה חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו	1	Here, **eyes** represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that King Ahasuerus decided not to kill Esther for coming into the inner court without being summoned. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased to see her”
513	5:2	uu8s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠יּ֨וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֤יט הַ⁠זָּהָב֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠יָד֔⁠וֹ	1	King Ahasuerus did this to show that he would not enforce the law that said that Esther should be executed for coming into the king’s inner court without being summoned. See how you translated this in 4:11. Alternate translation: “he extended the gold scepter toward her.”
514	5:2	abt3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יּ֨וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֤יט הַ⁠זָּהָב֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠יָד֔⁠וֹ	1	King Ahasuerus did this to show that he would not enforce the law that said Esther should be executed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he extended the gold scepter toward her to signal that he would be glad to talk to her.”
515	5:2	abt4			וַ⁠תִּקְרַ֣ב	1	Alternate translation; “so … came close” or “so … came up to the throne”
516	5:2	z4mn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠תִּגַּ֖ע בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט	1	This action was probably customary for a king’s subjects in a Persian court, when the king extended the royal scepter.
517	5:2	abt5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠תִּגַּ֖ע בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט	1	This action demonstrated that Esther respected the authority of King Ahasuerus and was thankful for his kindness to her. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could include that information here, such as: “ … to show that she respected his authority.”
518	5:2	j59r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט	1	Here, **head** is a metonym meaning the top (or uppermost part) of an object or location. This phrase means that Esther touched the top of the king’s scepter on the end that was extended toward her. Alternate translation: “the top of the scepter” or “the tip of the scepter”
519	5:3	abt6			מַה־לָּ֖⁠ךְ אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה	1	Alternate translation: “What do you want, Queen Esther?”
520	5:3	abt7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	מַה־לָּ֖⁠ךְ אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ	1	These two phrases mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that he is very interested in hearing why Esther has come to see him. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if it would be more natural in your language to combine them into one. Alternate translation: “What do you want, Queen Esther?”
521	5:3	j61r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠יִנָּ֥תֵֽן לָֽ⁠ךְ	1	This was probably a formal and customary expression in the Persian royal court, meant to show honor to the person making a request of the king and to indicate the king’s willingness to be very generous when answering the request. King Ahasuerus was almost certainly not offering to give Esther half of his kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is.” Alternate translation: “I will give you what you want, even if you ask me to give you half of my kingdom!”
522	5:3	c6h7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠יִנָּ֥תֵֽן לָֽ⁠ךְ	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for” or “I will give you what you want”
523	5:4	abt8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב	1	This is an idiom. See how you translated it in 1:19 and 3:9. Alternate translation: “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king”
524	5:4	m3uy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב	1	Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king”
525	5:4	j63r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	יָב֨וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָן֙	1	Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “O king, please come with Haman” or “you and Haman come”
526	5:4	abt9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־עָשִׂ֥יתִי לֽ⁠וֹ	1	Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “the banquet that I have prepared for you”
527	5:4	abu0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־עָשִׂ֥יתִי לֽ⁠וֹ	1	If you decide to translate this as “the banquet that I have prepared for you,” then the word “you” should be singular, since here it refers just to the king.
528	5:5	abu1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	The king would have said this to his servants, not to Esther. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The king said to his servants”
529	5:5	abu2			מַהֲרוּ֙ אֶת־הָמָ֔ן לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת אֶת־דְּבַ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֑ר	1	The **word of Esther** means her invitation to the banquet. Alternate translation: “go and get Haman and bring him quickly to the banquet that Esther has prepared”
530	5:5	abu3			עָשְׂתָ֥ה	1	Alternate translation: “had prepared for them”
531	5:6	d5wr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ	1	These two question-and-statement pairs mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice in slightly different ways to show that he is truly disposed to give Esther whatever she wants. If this is confusing, you do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation. you can combine them into one or replace the repetition with a statement of what the repetition means, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “now please tell me what you really want. I will do it for you”
532	5:6	pj3p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ	1	When Ahasuerus asked Esther in the throne room what she wanted, she said that she wanted him and Haman to come to a banquet she had prepared. But since the king asks her once again at the banquet what she wants, it is clear that he knew this was not her real request. Instead, he knew that she wanted to show him hospitality first, as a gesture of respect for him and their relationship. You can indicate this by translating, “Now please tell me what you really want.”
533	5:6	q5nt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ & בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ	1	The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “what you really want”
534	5:6	e2v2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן & וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ	1	You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for”
535	5:6	j65r			עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת	1	See how you translated this expression in [5:3](../05/03.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is”
536	5:7	abu5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	וַ⁠תַּ֥עַן & וַ⁠תֹּאמַ֑ר	1	Here a single idea is being expressed by using two words connected with “and.” Together the two words mean that Esther responded to the question that the king asked her. Alternate translation: “answered” or “replied”
537	5:7	r4aw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	שְׁאֵלָתִ֖⁠י וּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י	1	The words **petition** and **request** mean the same thing. Esther probably used these words together as a way of speaking very formally and respectfully to the king. Alternate translation: “this is what I want”
538	5:7	abu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	שְׁאֵלָתִ֖⁠י וּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י	1	The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “this is what I want”
539	5:8	c2br		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ	1	The expression **find favor** means to gain the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me”
540	5:8	abu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ	1	Here, **eyes** represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means the King Ahasuerus is pleased with Esther and willing to grant her request. Alternate translation: “if the king evaluates me and approves” or “if the king is pleased with me”
541	5:8	c2jy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ	1	Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me”
542	5:8	abu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ ט֔וֹב	1	This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [1:19](../01/19.md), [3:9](../03/09.md), and [5:4](../05/04.md). Alternate translation: “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king”
543	5:8	j69r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	לָ⁠תֵת֙ אֶת־שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת אֶת־בַּקָּשָׁתִ֑⁠י	1	The phrases **to grant my petition** and **to perform my request** mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “to do what I want”
544	5:8	x8hf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	יָב֧וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָ֗ן אֶל־הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠הֶ֔ם	1	Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “please come with Haman to another banquet that I will prepare for you”
545	5:8	j71r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	יָב֧וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָ֗ן אֶל־הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠הֶ֔ם	1	If you decide to translate this as “the banquet that I have prepared for you,” then the word “you” should be dual if your language uses that form, since it refers to the king and Haman, otherwise it should be plural.
546	5:8	abu9			וּ⁠מָחָ֥ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֖ה כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	The **word of the king** means his request for Esther to tell him what she wants. Alternate translation: “I will answer your question then”
547	5:8	gf9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “according to your word”
548	5:9	abv1			וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֤א	1	Alternate translation: “and … left the banquet”
549	5:9	j73r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	שָׂמֵ֖חַ וְ⁠ט֣וֹב לֵ֑ב	1	The word **joyful** and the phrase **good of heart** mean the same thing. These terms are used together to show that Haman was very happy after attending Esther’s banquet with King Ahasuerus. Alternate translation: “feeling very good”
550	5:9	j75r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠ט֣וֹב לֵ֑ב	1	Here, **heart** represents the action of thinking or feeling. The phrase means that Haman felt happy.
551	5:9	dkg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠לֹא־קָם֙	1	Under other circumstances, officials were expected to bow low to the ground to show respect for Haman. See [3:2](../03/02.md). But since Mordecai was already sitting on the ground as a sign of mourning, he would have been expected to stand up to show respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Mordecai did not stand up to show respect for Haman”
552	5:9	j77r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וְ⁠לֹא־זָ֣ע מִמֶּ֔⁠נּוּ	1	The phrase means that Mordecai was not afraid of Haman or of what Haman might do to him for refusing to show the respect that the king had commanded. Alternate translation: “or tremble fearfully in front of him”
553	5:9	s47u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֥א הָמָ֛ן עַֽל־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י חֵמָֽה	1	Here, **Haman’s rage** is described as something that could fill him up. See how you translated this expression in [3:5](../03/05.md). Alternate translation: “Haman became very angry because of Mordecai”
554	5:10	v5nl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וַ⁠יִּתְאַפַּ֣ק הָמָ֔ן	1	There is a contrast between this sentence and the previous one. Haman felt very much like doing one thing, but he decided it would be better to do something else. The contrast can be indicated with a phrase such as “but even though.” Alternate translation: “but even though Haman was so angry, he kept himself from losing his temper” or “Haman refused to show how angry he was”
555	5:10	bcn1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	זֶ֥רֶשׁ	1	This is a woman’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter and the next. Be sure to translate it consistently.
556	5:11	abv4			וַ⁠יְסַפֵּ֨ר לָ⁠הֶ֥ם	1	Alternate translation: “then … made a long speech to them about”
557	5:11	mvm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	כְּב֥וֹד עָשְׁר֖⁠וֹ	1	**Glory** and **wealth** are both abstract nouns. Alternate translation: “Haman told them about how great his wealth was” or “Haman told them about the many great things he owned”
558	5:11	j79r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וְ⁠רֹ֣ב בָּנָ֑י⁠ו	1	Having many sons was probably seen as a mark of honor and status in Persian culture. This phrase probably means that Haman was boasting about the status he enjoyed in Persian society because he had many sons. Alternate translation: “how many sons he had”
559	5:11	abv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	בָּנָ֑י⁠ו	1	This word can sometimes be used in Hebrew to mean both male and female children. However, here it clearly refers to male children, so you should translate it that way.
560	5:11	m7fq			גִּדְּל֤⁠וֹ	1	Alternate translation: “how the king had continually given him more authority” or “how the king had honored him many times by giving him more important work”
561	5:11	b7c5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	נִשְּׂא֔⁠וֹ עַל	1	Here, **lifting** is a metaphor meaning to “advance” or “promote” a person to a higher, more important position than they had previously. Alternate translation: “given him a position more important than”
562	5:11	abv6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	This means all of the others, as [3:1](../03/01.md) makes clear. Alternate translation: “all of his other officials and administrators”
563	5:11	xwvh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	The words **officials** and **administrators** mean similar things. If your language uses one word for these, you can combine them.
564	5:12	abv7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	אַ֣ף	1	You can translate it as an exclamation because Haman believes he has saved the best for last and is now introducing what he considers to be his most recent significant honor. Alternate translation: “and that is not all”
565	5:12	w1bm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	לֹא־הֵבִיאָה֩ אֶסְתֵּ֨ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֧ה עִם־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ & כִּ֣י אִם־אוֹתִ֑⁠י	1	This can be expressed positively. Alternate translation: “I was the only one Queen Esther invited besides the king” or “Queen Esther invited just two of us, the king and me”
566	5:12	abv8			עָשָׂ֖תָה	1	Alternate translation: “she had prepared”
567	5:12	abv9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠גַם־לְ⁠מָחָ֛ר אֲנִ֥י קָֽרוּא־לָ֖⁠הּ עִם־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and she has invited me to attend another banquet with the king again tomorrow”
568	5:13	abw0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠כָל־זֶ֕ה אֵינֶ֥⁠נּוּ שֹׁוֶ֖ה לִ֑⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־עֵ֗ת אֲשֶׁ֨ר אֲנִ֤י רֹאֶה֙	1	This is a figurative way of speaking. It is as if Haman is weighing his happiness on one side of a scale and his unhappiness on the other side. Haman is saying that his happiness over all the honors he has received is still not greater than his unhappiness over seeing Mordecai fail to honor him, so on balance, he is unhappy. Alternate translation: “I still cannot be happy as long as I keep seeing” or “all of this does not make me happy” or “ … does not satisfy me”
569	5:13	wu84			וְ⁠כָל־זֶ֕ה	1	Haman is continuing to speak here. You can show this by beginning with “Then Haman said.”
570	5:13	abw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔י	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai.
571	5:13	abw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	יוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Haman could be referring to the way Mordecai has been refusing to stand up to honor him, or he could be referring generally to the way Mordecai has never honored him (by either bowing or standing up) ever since he was appointed to a position in the king’s service and stationed at the gate. Either way, being reminded of this dishonor is the reason why Haman continues to be unhappy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sitting at the citadel gate and refusing to honor me”
572	5:13	abw3			בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Alternate translation: “the citadel gate”
573	5:14	abw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠תֹּ֣אמֶר ל⁠וֹ֩ זֶ֨רֶשׁ אִשְׁתּ֜⁠וֹ וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו	1	The verb is feminine, so it is Zeresh who is speaking here. By mentioning the friends, it is implied that they are in agreement with what she says. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say, “Then Haman’s wife Zeresh suggested, and his friends agreed.”
574	5:14	j81r			וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו	1	This means the friends whom Haman had invited to his home that day. Alternate translation: “his friends who were there”
575	5:14	abw5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	יַֽעֲשׂוּ	1	You can say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “have your servants set up”
576	5:14	i2f3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	עֵץ֮	1	See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow.
577	5:14	k8zd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance	גָּבֹ֣הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּה֒	1	You can convert this to a modern measure if that is the style of translation that you are using. Alternate translation: “seventy-five feet high” or “twenty-five meters high”
578	5:14	hiui		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֱמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what Haman would say to the king. Alternate translation: “speak to the king and tell him that you would like to hang Mordecai on it” or “tell the king that you intend to hang Mordecai on it”
579	5:14	abw7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit who does the action. Probably, Haman’s servants would carry out the action. But since it would happen under Haman’s orders and perhaps under his supervision, you could also describe him as the one who does the action if that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have your servants hang Mordecai on it” or “and hang Mordecai on it”
580	5:14	abw8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	וּ⁠בֹֽא & אֶל הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה שָׂמֵ֑חַ	1	**Then** indicates more than a time sequence here. Zeresh and the friends are saying what the result would be. Alternate translation: “after he is dead, you will be able to go to the banquet … in a good mood”
581	5:14	bbs9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וַ⁠יִּיטַ֧ב הַ⁠דָּבָ֛ר לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן	1	The **word** was the suggestion that Zeresh and the friends made. Here, **face** represents Haman himself by something associated with him, his face, which showed what he was thinking and feeling. Alternate translation: “Haman decided that he liked this idea” or “that suggestion pleased Haman”
582	5:14	i8is			וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ הָ⁠עֵֽץ	1	Haman most likely did not do this personally. He ordered it to be done. Alternate translation: “he gave his servants orders to set up the pole” or “he told his servants to construct the gallows”
583	5:14	j83r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הָ⁠עֵֽץ	1	See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow.
584	6:intro	i9x7				0	# Esther 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter continues the story of Haman’s fall.\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Approaching the king\n\nIt was not possible for a person to easily approach the king. Normally, access to him was very limited. There are several events in this chapter which show the layers of protection surrounding the king.
585	6:1	j85r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	בַּ⁠לַּ֣יְלָה הַ⁠ה֔וּא	1	This introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural way of introducing a new event in your language.
586	6:1	abw9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	נָדְדָ֖ה שְׁנַ֣ת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	Here, **sleep** is spoken of as if it were a living thing that could flee away. Alternate translation: “the king could not sleep”
587	6:1	abx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֹּ֗אמֶר לְ⁠הָבִ֞יא	1	**He** means the king. The implication is that he told the young men who attended him to do this. Verses 3 and 5 indicate this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so he commanded his servants to fetch”
588	6:1	abx2			סֵ֤פֶר הַ⁠זִּכְרֹנוֹת֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים	1	This is equivalent to the expression “the book of the events of days” in [2:23](../02/23.md). See how you translated that expression. Alternate translation: “the royal chronicles” or “the records of what had happened during all the time that he had been king”
589	6:1	abx3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּהְי֥וּ נִקְרָאִ֖ים	1	This means that the chronicles were read out loud. You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the young men got the chronicles and began to read them out loud”
590	6:1	j87r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Here, **face** represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that the book was being read in the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “to the king”
591	6:2	u4gi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֣א כָת֗וּב	1	Both terms **found** and **recorded** can be expressed in active form. Alternate translation: “they found that the writers had recorded there” or “they read the part where the writers had written”
592	6:2	abx4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הִגִּ֨יד מָרְדֳּכַ֜י עַל	1	The implication is that Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering the plot and telling him about it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering a plot against the king and telling him about it”
593	6:2	abx5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	הִגִּ֨יד מָרְדֳּכַ֜י עַל	1	To relate the events in chronological order, you can put this at the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “but Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering their plot and telling him about it”
594	6:2	syd9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בִּגְתָ֣נָא וָ⁠תֶ֗רֶשׁ	1	These are the same two men who are named in [2:21](../02/21.md). However, there the first man’s name is said to be “Bigthan.” Decide on a consistent way of translating these names so your readers will know that they are the same men.
595	6:2	abx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	שְׁנֵי֙ סָרִיסֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	See how you translated the term **eunuch** in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “two of the royal guardians”
596	6:2	abx7			מִ⁠שֹּׁמְרֵ֖י הַ⁠סַּ֑ף	1	See how you translated this expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “who protected the doorway to the king’s private quarters”
597	6:2	abx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בִּקְשׁוּ֙	1	Here, **seeking** means actively trying to do something. Alternate translation: “they had planned” or “they had tried”
598	6:2	j89r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד	1	As in [2:21](../02/21.md), the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. Alternate translation: “to assassinate” or “to kill”
599	6:3	lmz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	מַֽה־נַּעֲשָׂ֞ה יְקָ֧ר וּ⁠גְדוּלָּ֛ה לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י	1	**Honor** and **greatness** have similar meanings and they are used together to emphasize that Mordecai should certainly have been honored in some grand way for saving the king’s life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this by putting the terms together. For example, you could say, “What great honor was done for Mordecai?” Alternate translation: “what did we do to reward Mordecai or to show that we appreciated what he did”
600	6:3	aby0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	נַּעֲשָׂ֞ה	1	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what did I do” or “what did we do”
601	6:3	n2az		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	לֹא־נַעֲשָׂ֥ה עִמּ֖⁠וֹ דָּבָֽר	1	You can say this with an active form. However, it would be good to say this in a way that does not create the impression that the young men are accusing the king. Alternate translation: “no one did anything for him”
602	6:3	aby1			עַל־זֶ֑ה	1	Alternate translation: “for saving my life”
603	6:4	aby2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	מִ֣י בֶ⁠חָצֵ֑ר	1	This could mean either: (1) The king knows that there is someone in the courtyard, maybe because he heard someone walking there; he wants to know who it is. (2) Since there are always people around the palace, the king assumes that there must be someone out in the courtyard. In either case, the king wants to know if there is someone there with whom he could consult about the best way to honor Mordecai. As the story has already said in [1:13](../01/13.md), it was the king’s habit to consult his advisors on important questions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king wanted to consult someone about the best way to honor Mordecai, so he asked, ‘who is in the courtyard’”
604	6:4	aby3			מִ֣י בֶ⁠חָצֵ֑ר	1	In order to present the events in logical and chronological order, you can put the king’s question last in the verse if that would be more natural in your language. Haman had already come in the courtyard by the time the king asked this question.
605	6:4	j91r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	וְ⁠הָמָ֣ן בָּ֗א לַ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠חִ֣יצוֹנָ֔ה לֵ⁠אמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠תְלוֹת֙ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֔י עַל־הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ אֲשֶׁר־הֵכִ֥ין לֽ⁠וֹ	1	This sentence indicates that Haman had already entered the outer court when King Ahasuerus asked his question. You could indicate this with a phrase such as “at that moment” or “just then” or “while they were talking”
606	6:4	rg8t			לַ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠חִ֣יצוֹנָ֔ה	1	This phrase is describing the first courtyard a person would come to after entering the palace from the outside. Alternate translation: “the outer courtyard of the palace”
607	6:4	vu7p			לֵ⁠אמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠תְלוֹת֙ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֔י	1	Alternate translation: “to tell the king that he wanted to hang Mordecai” or “to tell the king that he wanted to impale Mordecai”
608	6:4	at53			הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ אֲשֶׁר־הֵכִ֥ין לֽ⁠וֹ	1	Alternate translation: “on the pole that he had set up” or “on the gallows that he had set up for Mordecai”
609	6:4	aby4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ	1	See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow.
610	6:5	aby5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמְר֜וּ נַעֲרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙	1	It is implied that the young men went and looked, perhaps through a window or a doorway, to see who might be in the courtyard before they answered the king. If it would be helpful in your language, you can say so. Alternate translation: “the young men who served the king looked and saw that Haman was in the courtyard. They said”
611	6:5	j93r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הִנֵּ֥ה	1	This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation. You could also have the young men address the king directly to get his attention. Alternate translation: “O king”
612	6:5	j95r			יָבֽוֹא	1	Alternate translation: “he may come in”
613	6:6	j97r			וַ⁠יָּבוֹא֮ הָמָן֒ וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר ל⁠וֹ֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	Alternate translation: “when Haman came in, the king said”
614	6:6	ky5i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	מַה־לַ⁠עֲשׂ֕וֹת בָּ⁠אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ	1	Here the king speaks of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person instead. Alternate translation: “what should I do for the man whom I would really like to honor”
615	6:6	n3r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ	1	**To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do it and to really want to do it. Alternate translation: “whom I am glad to honor” or “whom I want to honor”
616	6:6	jh4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הָמָן֙ בְּ⁠לִבּ֔⁠וֹ	1	Here, **heart** could mean two different things: (1) Heart could represent the action of thinking or feeling. In that case, the phrase would mean “then Haman said in his thoughts.” (2) Heart could also be a metaphor meaning to be inside someone or something. In that case, the phrase would mean “then Haman said inside himself.” Either way, the phrase means that Haman was not saying this out loud, but saying it to himself in his thoughts. Alternate translation: “Haman thought to himself”
617	6:6	yft1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	לְ⁠מִ֞י יַחְפֹּ֥ץ הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת יְקָ֖ר יוֹתֵ֥ר מִמֶּֽ⁠נִּי	1	Haman is actually making a statement to himself rather than asking a question and trying to figure out the answer. He uses a question form to emphasize how true he believes the statement to be. If it would be helpful in your language, instead of a question, you could use a statement such as, “Surely there is no one whom the king would take pleasure in honoring more than me!” Alternate translation: “whom would the king like to honor more than me”
618	6:7	j1d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ	1	**To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do it and to really want to do it. Alternate translation: “for a man the king is glad to honor” or “for a man the king wants to honor”
619	6:7	aby6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ	1	Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “if you really want to honor someone”
620	6:8	mz79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	יָבִ֨יאוּ֙	1	The implication is that the king’s servants would do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “let someone bring” or “tell your servants to bring”
621	6:8	aby7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	לְב֣וּשׁ מַלְכ֔וּת אֲשֶׁ֥ר לָֽבַשׁ־בּ֖⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	**Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to anything that belongs to the king. You can translate this idea with an adjective, “a royal garment.” Alternate translation: “one of your own royal robes that you have already worn yourself” or “one of the robes you wear to show that you are the king”
622	6:8	aby8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	אֲשֶׁ֥ר לָֽבַשׁ־בּ֖⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “that you have already worn yourself”
623	6:8	aby9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	וְ⁠ס֗וּס אֲשֶׁ֨ר רָכַ֤ב עָלָי⁠ו֙	1	Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “a horse that you have already ridden yourself”
624	6:8	r63j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר נִתַּ֛ן כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת בְּ⁠רֹאשֽׁ⁠וֹ	1	This whole phrase refers to the horse. You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and that has a royal crown on its head”
625	6:8	abz0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר נִתַּ֛ן כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת בְּ⁠רֹאשֽׁ⁠וֹ	1	The implication is that this would be done to show that this was one of the king’s own horses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and that has a royal crown on its head to show that it belongs to you”
626	6:8	abz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת	1	**Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate this idea with an adjective, “a royal crown.”
627	6:9	pp3l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נָת֨וֹן הַ⁠לְּב֜וּשׁ וְ⁠הַ⁠סּ֗וּס עַל־יַד־אִ֞ישׁ מִ⁠שָּׂרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙	1	Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. It appears that the king himself would not perform such acts of service to one of his subjects even if he really wanted to honor that person. So Haman is saying that on behalf of the king, representing his authority and power, one of the king’s most noble officials should present the man with the robe and the horse. Alternate translation: “then, on your behalf, have one of your most noble officials present the man with the robe and the horse”
628	6:9	j1d3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	אִ֞ישׁ מִ⁠שָּׂרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַֽ⁠פַּרְתְּמִ֔ים	1	Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “one of your most noble officials”
629	6:9	pfz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠הִלְבִּ֨ישׁוּ֙	1	Since **them** is plural, it likely refers to the king’s servants. If it would be helpful in your language, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “have your servants clothe … with the robe”
630	6:9	j1d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּֽ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ	1	**To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the man whom you really want to honor”
631	6:9	abz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּֽ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ	1	Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “the man whom you really want to honor”
632	6:9	abz4			בִּ⁠רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר	1	This refers to a large, open space in the city, either the space that was in front of the palace (as in [4:6](../04/06.md)), or a space inside one of the city gates. In either case, this would have been a public area where people could gather, and so it was a place where a great number of people would have seen how the king was honoring Mordecai. Alternate translation: “through the public square of the city”
633	6:9	qs3k			וְ⁠קָרְא֣וּ	1	Alternate translation: “and tell the noble official and servants to proclaim” or “and have them shout out”
634	6:9	j1d7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לְ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו	1	Here, **face** represents the front of a person. The phrase means that the servants were to shout out to the people in front of the man on the horse, that is, to the people who were in the path of his horse as it approached. Alternate translation: “to whoever is in front of them”
635	6:9	j1d9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	כָּ֚כָה יֵעָשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ	1	**To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this because he really wants to honor this man” or “this is what the king does when he especially wants to honor someone”
636	6:9	pwgm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	כָּ֚כָה יֵעָשֶׂ֣ה	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this” or “this is what the king does”
637	6:10	j2d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ	1	The implication is that the king liked Haman’s suggestion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king liked this idea, so he replied”
638	6:10	abz5			כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֣ר דִּבַּ֔רְתָּ וַֽ⁠עֲשֵׂה־כֵן֙	1	Alternate translation: “do everything that you have said” or “do just what you have suggested”
639	6:10	abz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	הַ⁠יּוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	As in [2:19](../02/19.md), this is likely an idiom which means that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate. Alternate translation: “one of my servants, who is stationed at the king’s gate”
640	6:10	abz7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	הַ⁠יּוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	Here the king speaks of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “one of my servants, who is stationed at the gate to the palace”
641	6:10	gln7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	אַל־תַּפֵּ֣ל דָּבָ֔ר	1	Here the action of letting **fall** is a metaphor meaning to leave out or leave unfulfilled. The phrase means that Haman must do absolutely everything that he said. Alternate translation: “do not leave out anything that you suggested”
642	6:10	abz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	אַל־תַּפֵּ֣ל דָּבָ֔ר	1	This can be stated positively. Alternate translation: “Be sure to do absolutely everything that you have said”
643	6:11	abz9			וַ⁠יַּרְכִּיבֵ֨⁠הוּ֙ בִּ⁠רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר	1	See how you translated these expressions in verse 9. Alternate translation: “seated him on the horse and then led the horse through the public square of the city”
644	6:11	j2d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֣א לְ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו	1	Here, **face** represents the front of a person. The phrase means that Haman shouted out to the people in front of Mordecai, that is, the people who were in the path of his horse as it approached. Alternate translation: “called out to all of the people in front of him”
645	6:11	j2d7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ	1	**To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this because he really wants to honor this man”
646	6:12	uri5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	אָבֵ֖ל וַ⁠חֲפ֥וּי רֹֽאשׁ	1	People often covered their heads to show that they were either extremely sad or ashamed. Alternate translation: “covering his head because he felt completely disgraced”
647	6:13	j3d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יְסַפֵּ֨ר הָמָ֜ן	1	The implication is that, just as Haman gathered his friends together in [5:10](../05/10.md) to boast of his status, now he gathered them together once again to talk about what had just happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Haman brought all his friends together again. He told …”
648	6:13	aca1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר קָרָ֑⁠הוּ	1	The implication is that he told about the things that had happened to him “that day.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly.
649	6:13	aca2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֹּ֩אמְרוּ֩ ל֨⁠וֹ חֲכָמָ֜י⁠ו וְ⁠זֶ֣רֶשׁ	1	The implication is that, just as King Ahasuerus had royal advisors, Haman had advisors of his own. They would have been included among the “friends” he gathered for this occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of his friends were also his advisors, and they and his wife Zeresh told him”
650	6:13	aca3			חֲכָמָ֜י⁠ו	1	See how you translated this expression in [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “his advisors”
651	6:13	fd5k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	אִ֣ם & מָרְדֳּכַ֞י אֲשֶׁר֩ הַחִלּ֨וֹתָ לִ⁠נְפֹּ֤ל לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֙	1	This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) The action of falling could refer to bowing down and it could be a metaphor meaning to be dishonored and defeated. Haman wanted Mordecai to bow down in front of him. But instead, the story would be saying that Haman is starting to bow down (in a metaphorical sense) in front of Mordecai. Alternate translation: “Mordecai has begun to humiliate you. If he … ” (2) “Fall” could be a figurative way of saying “be killed in battle.” In that case, Zeresh would be comparing Haman and Mordecai to two soldiers who are fighting. She is saying that Haman has already “begun to fall,” that is, he is losing the battle, and he is likely to be killed. Alternate translation: “Mordecai has begun to defeat you. Since he …”
652	6:13	j3d3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֙	1	Here, **face** represents the front of a person. This could mean: (1) that Haman has already begun to fall down (bow down) in front of Mordecai figuratively, or (2) that Haman and Mordecai are facing one another in hand-to-hand combat. Alternate translation: “before whom” or “in whose presence”
653	6:13	p5t2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מִ⁠זֶּ֣רַע הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֡ים	1	Here, **seed** means “descendants.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is among the descendants of the Jews”
654	6:13	nan5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לֹא־תוּכַ֣ל ל֔⁠וֹ	1	Here Haman’s wife and friends are again speaking as if Haman is in a battle with Mordecai. Alternate translation: “you will not win against him” or “you will not have greater honor than he has”
655	6:13	j3d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	כִּֽי	1	This conjunction indicates a contrast between the actions of prevailing (in the previous clause) and falling.
656	6:13	j3d7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	נָפ֥וֹל תִּפּ֖וֹל	1	Here the action of **falling**: (1) either refers once again to prostrating oneself, and is a metaphor meaning to be dishonored and defeated, or (2) Haman’s wife and friends are saying that for Haman, defeat will be the outcome of the figurative battle. Alternate translation: “you will certainly lose to him”
657	6:13	j3d9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לְ⁠פָנָֽי⁠ו	1	Here, **face** represents the front of a person. The phrase means that Haman will lose in his struggle with Mordecai. Alternate translation: “before him” or “in his presence”
658	6:14	j4d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	עוֹדָ⁠ם֙ מְדַבְּרִ֣ים עִמּ֔⁠וֹ	1	This phrase indicates something that happened after Haman’s wife and friends started talking with Haman and while they were still talking. You should indicate this with a phrase such as “while.” Alternate translation: “while they were still talking together, the king’s eunuchs arrived”
659	6:14	aca4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	וְ⁠סָרִיסֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ	1	See how you decided to translate this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). Not all of the king’s eunuchs came. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of the king’s servants”
660	6:14	aca5			וַ⁠יַּבְהִ֨לוּ֙ לְ⁠הָבִ֣יא אֶת־הָמָ֔ן	1	Alternative translation: “they wanted to bring Haman quickly”
661	6:14	aca6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֲשֶׁר־עָשְׂתָ֥ה אֶסְתֵּֽר	1	Esther’s servants would have done most of the work of preparing the banquet. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “that Esther and her servants had prepared”
662	7:intro	x4w3				0	# Ester 7: Notas Generales\n\n## Estructura y Formato\n\nLa historia de la caída de Amán concluye en este capítulo. \n\n## Problemas de traducción en este capítulo\n\n ### Cubrir el rostro de Amán \n\nCuando “los sirvientes cubrieron el rostro de Amán”, estaban mostrando que él había sido condenado a ser ejecutado. (Vea: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
663	7:1	n8vb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	וַ⁠יָּבֹ֤א הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠הָמָ֔ן לִ⁠שְׁתּ֖וֹת עִם־אֶסְתֵּ֥ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּֽה	1	Ester no solo invitó a Asuero y Amán a beber. El narrador está usando una figura retórica donde se menciona solo una parte (la bebida) para referirse a todo el banquete. Traducción alternativa: “así que el rey y Amán fueron al segundo banquete que la reina Ester había preparado”.
664	7:2	xt9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠יּ֤וֹם הַ⁠שֵּׁנִי֙	1	This refers to the day after the first banquet, as mentioned in [5:8](../05/08.md). Alternate translation: “at that second banquet” or “on that second day of feasting”
665	7:2	s5ae			בְּ⁠מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה הַ⁠יַּ֔יִן	1	Alternate translation: “while they were drinking wine” or “while the servants were pouring the wine and giving it to them”
666	7:2	yks7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ & וְ⁠תִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ	1	These two statements mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that he is truly disposed to giving Esther what she wants. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “now please tell me what you really want. Tell me, and I will do it for you”
667	7:2	p1xt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ	1	Ahasuerus has now allowed Esther to show her hospitality at two banquets. But he knows that she has done this as a gesture of respect for him and their relationship, and that this signals that she has an important and urgent request to make. You can indicate this by having the king ask, “Now please tell me what you really want.”
668	7:2	sem7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠תִנָּ֣תֵֽן & וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ	1	You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. Alternate translation: “I will give you what you ask for” or “I will do for you what you ask”
669	7:2	j4d3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ & בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ	1	The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “what you really want”
670	7:2	j4d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת	1	See how you translated this expression in [5:3](../05/03.md) and [5:6](../05/06.md). Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is”
671	7:3	ac96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	וַ⁠תַּ֨עַן & וַ⁠תֹּאמַ֔ר	1	Here a single idea is being expressed by using two words connected with “and.” Together the two words mean that Esther responded to the question that the king asked her. Alternate translation: “answered”
672	7:3	k27c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙	1	**Favor** means the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me”
673	7:3	aca7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙	1	Here, **eyes** represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me”
674	7:3	j4d7			הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	In this case, Esther is addressing Ahasuerus directly as “O king”; she is not speaking about him in the third person as a sign of respect, as she and others usually do elsewhere in the story. This may indicate a special urgency to what she is saying, so it would be good to include this difference in your translation or indicate the urgency in some other way.
675	7:3	aca8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב	1	This is an idiom that also appears in [1:19](../01/19.md), [3:9](../03/09.md), [5:4](../05/04.md), and [5:8](../05/08.md). The suggested translation in those cases was, “If it seems like a good plan to you, O king.” That was suitable for the deferential tone the speakers were using. But here, Esther has just addressed the king directly with “O king” and she is pleading urgently for the survival of her whole people. So an alternate translation here could be something more like, “I hope you will be willing to do what I ask”
676	7:3	aca9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	תִּנָּֽתֶן־לִ֤⁠י נַפְשִׁ⁠י֙ בִּ⁠שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י וְ⁠עַמִּ֖⁠י בְּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י	1	The phrases **at my petition** and **at my request** mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the urgency of the request. If it would be more natural in your language, you could combine the two requests. Alternate translation: “please spare my life and save my people” or “my request is that you spare my life and the lives of my people”
677	7:3	j4d9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	תִּנָּֽתֶן־לִ֤⁠י נַפְשִׁ⁠י֙	1	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “please spare my life”
678	7:3	bvi1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	בִּ⁠שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י	1	The abstract noun **petition** can be expressed with the verb “ask for.” Alternate translation: “that is what I am asking for” or “that is what I want”
679	7:3	qghp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	וְ⁠עַמִּ֖⁠י	1	If this is unclear in your language, you can repeat from the previous clause the words that have been left out. Alternate translation: “and let my people be given to me”
680	7:3	j5d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	בְּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י	1	The abstract noun **request** can be expressed with the verb “ask for.” Alternate translation: “rhat is what I am asking for” or “rhat is what I want”
681	7:4	acb1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	כִּ֤י נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙	1	As Esther points out later in the verse, the Jews actually have not been exchanged for money. Rather, **sell** is a figurative way of saying “turn over to.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning by saying something like “For someone has turned us over to our enemies.” Alternatively, you could use the same figure, but show that it is a comparison. Alternate translation: “it is as though I and my people are cattle that have been sold to be slaughtered”
682	7:4	fhs7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	כִּ֤י נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙	1	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for someone has sold us” or “for someone has put us in danger of our enemies”
683	7:4	e9cx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֖יד לַ⁠הֲר֣וֹג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֑ד	1	As in [3:13](../03/13.md), these words mean the same thing and are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction. If using three words would be difficult or confusing in your language, you could use one word for this and indicate that the destruction is extreme. Alternate translation: “and they are going to kill every one of us” (A “doublet” can involve the use of more than two words.)
684	7:4	yg01		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֖יד לַ⁠הֲר֣וֹג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֑ד	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns such as these, you can replace them with one or more verbs. Alternate translation: “and they are going to kill every one of us”
685	7:4	acb2			וְ֠⁠אִלּוּ לַ⁠עֲבָדִ֨ים וְ⁠לִ⁠שְׁפָח֤וֹת נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙	1	Alternate translation: “if the men and even the women had been sold into slavery”
686	7:4	j5d3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	אֵ֥ין הַ⁠צָּ֛ר שֹׁוֶ֖ה בְּ⁠נֵ֥זֶק הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Esther is speaking very deferentially and with some exaggeration in order to impress on the king how important this is to her. She is saying that it would have been worth less to her to see her people rescued from slavery than it would have been to see the king spared the trouble of intervening on their behalf. (Haman uses the expression of “not equal” in this same sense in [5:13](../05/13.md).) Alternate translation: “that would have been a matter too small to bother you with” or “that would be a small matter to a king like you, but this is very much worse”
687	7:4	acb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Esther addresses King Ahasuerus in the third person as a way of showing respect. Alternate translation: “you”
688	7:5	acb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙ & וַ⁠יֹּ֖אמֶר	1	These two words mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “responded”
689	7:5	acb6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	מִ֣י ה֥וּא זֶה֙ וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא	1	These two phrases mean similar things. They both ask about the identity of the man who is trying to destroy the Jews. King Ahasuerus uses the repetition to emphasize how outraged he is. If the repetition would be confusing in your language, you could combine the two phrases. However, from another perspective, both the man’s identity and his location are important to know so that his plot can be stopped. So, for that reason, you could also decide to include both phrases in your translation.
690	7:5	acb7			מִ֣י ה֥וּא זֶה֙ וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא	1	Alternate translation: “who has done this”
691	7:5	dl4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא אֲשֶׁר־מְלָא֥⁠וֹ לִבּ֖⁠וֹ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת כֵּֽן	1	Here the concept of a **full heart** uses two metaphors at once. “Heart” represents the action of thinking or feeling. Also, saying that the “heart” is “full” is a figurative way of saying that someone is fully intending to do something, usually something that should not be done. Alternate translation: “where is the man who is intending to do such a thing”
692	7:6	j5d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	צַ֣ר וְ⁠אוֹיֵ֔ב	1	These words mean the same thing. Together, they emphasize Haman’s complete hostility towards the Jews. If it is more natural in your language, you can combine them and indicate the emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation: “the one who is our absolute nemesis”
693	7:6	ar4f			נִבְעַ֔ת	1	Alternative translation: “was extremely afraid”
694	7:6	j5d9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	נִבְעַ֔ת מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֥י	1	Here, **face** means the presence of a person. The phrase means that Haman was now extremely afraid to be in the presence of King Ahasuerus and Queen Esther. Alternate translation: “this made Haman very afraid to be in the presence of the king and the queen”
695	7:7	bzd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ קָ֤ם בַּ⁠חֲמָת⁠וֹ֙ מִ⁠מִּשְׁתֵּ֣ה הַ⁠יַּ֔יִן	1	Here, **in his rage** is an idiom meaning to be extremely angry. Alternate translation: “the king was extremely angry and got up”
696	7:7	j6d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֶל־גִּנַּ֖ת הַ⁠בִּיתָ֑ן	1	The implication is that Ahasuerus went outside to absorb the shock that a man he had promoted to the highest position in his empire was plotting to destroy his queen and her whole people. Ahasuerus needed to sort out his conflicting loyalties and decide what to do about this. If it would be misunderstood, you could say explicitly why he went outside. Alternate translation: “he went outside to the palace garden to decide what to do.”
697	7:7	uaq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לְ⁠בַקֵּ֤שׁ עַל־נַפְשׁ⁠וֹ֙	1	Here, **seeking** means to beg or plead urgently for something. This phrase means that Haman wanted to beg Esther to persuade the king not to order his execution. Alternate translation: “to plead with Queen Esther to spare his life”
698	7:7	qz1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	כִּ֣י רָאָ֔ה	1	Here, **seeing** is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “he realized” or “he understood”
699	7:7	nin1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	כָלְתָ֥ה אֵלָ֛י⁠ו הָ⁠רָעָ֖ה מֵ⁠אֵ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king had decided to cause a disaster against him” or “the king was decided to destroy him” or “the king had decided to kill him”
700	7:7	j6d3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	כָלְתָ֥ה אֵלָ֛י⁠ו הָ⁠רָעָ֖ה מֵ⁠אֵ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Here the abstract noun **evil** means “harm,” not something that is morally wrong as in the previous verse. In this context, it can be expressed with a verb such as “execute.” Alternate translation: “the king was likely to execute him”
701	7:8	j6d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ שָׁב֩ & וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל	1	The implication is that when the king returned to the room, he saw what this verse describes next. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the king returned … , he saw that Haman had fallen …”
702	7:8	h4c7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ	1	The implication is that Haman was doing this as he pleaded for his life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add that information to the end of this phrase: “ … as he was begging Esther to spare his life”
703	7:8	acb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ	1	If you prefer to present the events in chronological order, you can put this information first in the verse. See the UST.
704	7:8	acb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ	1	The expression **was fallen** means that as Haman was begging for his life, he was not standing up; he had suddenly come down very close to Esther as she was reclining on a couch. (From the impression that the king got when he returned, it is possible that Haman was even grabbing her arms or shoulders as he pleaded with Esther.) Alternate translation: “Haman had come down very close to Esther as she was reclining on a banqueting couch” or “Haman had thrown himself down on the couch where Esther was reclining”
705	7:8	acc0			הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ	1	In this culture, especially at a banquet like this one, wealthy people would recline on couches as they ate and drank. Alternate translation: “Esther’s banqueting couch”
706	7:8	thq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	הֲ֠⁠גַם לִ⁠כְבּ֧וֹשׁ אֶת־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה עִמִּ֖⁠י בַּ⁠בָּ֑יִת	1	The king phrases this as a question to show his shock and anger at what he thinks Haman is doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could phrase it as a statement. Alternate translation: “he is even trying to rape the queen”
707	7:8	l4ce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	לִ⁠כְבּ֧וֹשׁ אֶת־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה	1	The story is using a mild expression to refer to something that is disturbing. In this context, “subdue” means “rape.” The king thought that Haman was trying to rape Esther, and he likely said just that. You can show this in your translation if you want to make this clear. Alternate translation: “trying to rape the queen”
708	7:8	acc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	עִמִּ֖⁠י בַּ⁠בָּ֑יִת	1	These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize the idea that they are expressing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. However, each one does indicate something slightly different about what a serious offense it would be if Haman actually were trying to rape Esther. It would be a violation of the king’s personal trust and a violation of the trust implicit in hospitality. So you could also include both phrases. Alternate translation: “in my presence and in my own house”
709	7:8	adq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר יָצָא֙ מִ⁠פִּ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	This expression describes the action of speaking. Alternate translation: “as soon as the king said this”
710	7:8	acc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר & וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ	1	The king spoke, and then the servants covered Haman’s face. One action followed upon another. However, this happened so quickly that almost no time seemed to pass in between. You can indicate this with a phrase like “as soon as.” Alternate translation: “when the king said this, immediately they covered Haman’s face”
711	7:8	j6d9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ	1	The implication is that some the king’s servants who were present did this, and they did it because they understood that the king wanted Haman to be executed. Alternate translation: “some of his servants covered Haman’s face because he was going to be executed”
712	7:8	acc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ	1	**Covering the face** in this culture, as in many others, was a sign that a person had been condemned to death. Alternate translation: “some of his servants covered Haman’s face to show that he would be executed”
713	7:9	a7ic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	חַ֠רְבוֹנָה	1	This is a man’s name. See how you translated it in [1:10](../01/10.md).
714	7:9	j7d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	אֶחָ֨ד מִן־הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֜ים לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ	1	Here, **face** represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that Harbona was one of the eunuchs who served King Ahasuerus personally.
715	7:9	acc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֜ים לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ	1	See how you translated this term and this phrase in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “the guardians who served the king personally”
716	7:9	j7d3			הִנֵּה	1	**Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, it can be omitted from your translation. But consider using an expression that is natural in your language for someone to address the king directly to get his attention. For example, you could say, “O king!”
717	7:9	acc5			גַּ֣ם & הָ⁠עֵ֣ץ אֲשֶׁר־עָשָׂ֪ה הָמָ֟ן לְֽ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י & עֹמֵד֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הָמָ֔ן	1	Alternate translation: “Haman has also set up a pole [or gallows] at his house because he wants to impale [or hang] Mordecai on it”
718	7:9	j7d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הָ⁠עֵ֣ץ	1	See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow.
719	7:9	j7d7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לְֽ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י אֲשֶׁ֧ר דִּבֶּר־ט֣וֹב עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ	1	This expression means that Mordecai said something that benefitted the king. Specifically, Mordecai reported an assassination plot and saved the king’s life. Alternate translation: “Mordecai, who saved the king’s life.”
720	7:9	j7d9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	דִּבֶּר־ט֣וֹב עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ	1	Harbona addresses the king in the third person as a way of showing respect. Alternate translation: “saved your life”
721	7:9	acc6			עֹמֵד֙	1	Alternate translation: “is set up”
722	7:9	sre1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance	גָּבֹ֖הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּ֑ה	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could convert this to a modern measure. See how you translated this phrase in [5:14](../05/14.md). Alternate translation: “seventy-five feet high” or “twenty-five meters high”
723	7:9	acc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	תְּלֻ֥⁠הוּ עָלָֽי⁠ו	1	**Him** means Haman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “hang [or impale] Haman on it”
724	7:10	j8d3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ	1	See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow.
725	7:10	umd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠חֲמַ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שָׁכָֽכָה	1	Here the story compares the king’s anger to floodwaters, which can cause great destruction. “Subside” means for waters to drain away and for their level to go down. You could express the meaning by saying something like “Then the king’s rage lessened,” or “Then the king was not so angry.” Or you could use a different metaphor that would be meaningful in your language, such as, “Then the king cooled off.”
726	8:intro	z6j7				0	# Esther 8 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### God’s protection\n\nYahweh is at work in this chapter preventing the possible destruction of the Jews. God used Esther and Mordecai to protect their people.
727	8:1	j8d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠ה֗וּא	1	This could mean one of three things: (1) A new series of events is now being described, but the story makes clear that they happened on the same day as the second banquet. While it must have been some time later in the day, the idea is that when Haman lost his life, and also his property, Esther gained what her enemy had lost. Alternate translation: “that same day” (2) The expression could also be an idiom that means “as of that day.” This would refer to the effective date for the transfer of Haman’s property to Esther. Alternate translation: “as of that day” (3) The term “day” could also be used to mean around the same time.
728	8:1	j8d7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	נָתַ֞ן הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה אֶת־בֵּ֥ית הָמָ֖ן	1	Here, **house** represents all the household and property of Haman. The story could be referring to all the property by naming one part of it, the house. Or “house” could be a metonym for “property,” meaning everything a person owns and keeps in their house, and by extension everything they own beyond the house as well. Alternate translation: “King Ahasuerus declared that everything that Haman had owned would now belong to Queen Esther”
729	8:1	nm3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	צֹרֵ֣ר הַיְּהוּדִ֑ים	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews”
730	8:1	acc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֗י בָּ֚א לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	The implication is that when the king learned how Mordecai was related to Esther, he summoned Mordecai into his presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “when he learned that, the king sent for Mordecai to come into his presence”
731	8:1	j8d9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	Here, **face** represents the presence of a person. This phrase indicates that Mordecai was allowed to come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “into his presence”
732	8:1	acd0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	הִגִּ֥ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֖ר מַ֥ה הוּא־לָֽ⁠הּ	1	You can say this before saying that the king summoned Mordecai, since it happened first. See the UST. Alternate translation: “Esther told the king how Mordecai was related to her”
733	8:1	j9d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הִגִּ֥ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֖ר מַ֥ה הוּא־לָֽ⁠הּ	1	Esther told this to the king. She would likely have explained not just how she and Mordecai were related, but that he had raised her after her parents died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Esther told the king that Mordecai was her cousin and that he had been like a father to her”
734	8:2	m5hz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠יָּ֨סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֗⁠וֹ & וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י	1	Giving the ring to Mordecai showed that Mordecai could now act on the king’s own authority, and it enabled him to do that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king now gave this ring to Mordecai to show that Mordecai had the power to act on the authority of the king”
735	8:2	acd1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	טַבַּעְתּ֗⁠וֹ	1	See how you translated this in [3:10](../03/10.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “the ring that had his official seal on it”
736	8:2	j9d3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱבִיר֙ מֵֽ⁠הָמָ֔ן	1	This means that the king had taken back his signet ring from Haman. He would have done this when he sentenced Haman to death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king had given Haman the ring that had his official seal on it, but he had taken it back from Haman when he sentenced Haman to death, and the king was wearing it again.”
737	8:2	acd2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱבִיר֙ מֵֽ⁠הָמָ֔ן	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first in the verse because it happened before everything else.
738	8:2	z5yn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י	1	By giving his signet ring to Mordecai, the king gave Mordecai the authority to write important papers that people would have to obey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. See the UST.
739	8:2	acd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠תָּ֧שֶׂם אֶסְתֵּ֛ר אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י עַל־בֵּ֥ית הָמָֽן	1	To place someone over something means to put them in charge of it. Alternate translation: “Esther appointed Mordecai to be in charge of everything that had belonged to Haman”
740	8:2	d2tj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בֵּ֥ית הָמָֽן	1	See the explanation of this phrase in verse 1. Alternate translation: “everything that Haman had owned” or “the household of Haman”
741	8:3	j9d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וַ⁠תּ֣וֹסֶף אֶסְתֵּ֗ר וַ⁠תְּדַבֵּר֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	Here the exact meaning of the progression of verbs is uncertain, but this verse probably begins a new event in the story separate from what happened in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “then Esther again spoke in the king’s presence”
742	8:3	j9d7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	Here, **face** represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “while she was in his presence”
743	8:3	j9d9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו	1	Here, **falling** is an idiom referring to the action of bowing down or prostrating oneself, and **face** represents the front of a person, place, or object. Alternate translation: “and she bowed down” or “and she prostrated herself”
744	8:3	acd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו	1	This may actually mean that Esther put her face right on top of the feet of King Ahasuerus. This would have been an act of humility and desperation by which she showed that her need was very great and that she believed the king had great power to help her.
745	8:3	acd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו	1	Esther’s action was probably a recognized sign of pleading in this culture. However, it would likely still have been remarkable for a queen to fall at the feet of her husband, the king. you could show this by introducing the information with a phrase like “in fact.” Alternate translation: “in fact, to show how desperately she was pleading, Esther got down and put her face right on top of his feet”
746	8:3	j1r1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו	1	Here, **face** is a metonym meaning the front of a person, place, or object. This phrase means that Esther prostrated herself in front of the feet of King Ahasuerus.
747	8:3	jmn7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לְ⁠הַֽעֲבִיר֙ אֶת־רָעַת֙ הָמָ֣ן הָֽ⁠אֲגָגִ֔י	1	Here, **the evil** refers to Haman’s plan. This expression means to prevent a wrong action from happening. Alternate translation: “to stop the evil plan of Haman the Agagite” or “to prevent the evil things from happening that Haman the Agagite had planned”
748	8:3	bp22		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הָֽ⁠אֲגָגִ֔י	1	This is the name of Haman’s people group. See how you translated this in [3:1](../03/01.md).
749	8:3	c2hw			מַֽחֲשַׁבְתּ֔⁠וֹ אֲשֶׁ֥ר חָשַׁ֖ב	1	Alternate translation: “and the plot that he had invented” or “and the plot that Haman invented”
750	8:4	xh24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠יּ֤וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֔ר אֵ֖ת שַׁרְבִ֣ט הַ⁠זָּהָ֑ב	1	As in [5:2](../05/02.md), King Ahasuerus did this to show that Esther had his favor. In that earlier episode, this indicated that he would not enforce the law that said Esther should be executed for coming into the inner court without being summoned. But since Esther was apparently already in the king’s presence on this occasion, it seems that the gesture could also be used generally to show that the king was positively disposed towards a person and would grant the person’s request. Alternate translation: “the king held out his golden scepter to Esther”
751	8:4	acd7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	שַׁרְבִ֣ט הַ⁠זָּהָ֑ב	1	See how you translated this in [4:11](../04/11.md). If it would be helpful, review the explanation of what this object was. Alternate translation: “golden scepter”
752	8:4	acd8			וַ⁠תָּ֣קָם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר	1	Alternate translation: “Esther got up off the floor”
753	8:4	j1r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Here, **face** represents the front of a person, place, or object. This phrase means the Esther now stood facing King Ahasuerus. Alternate translation: “and stood facing the king”
754	8:5	w7yl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב & וְ⁠כָשֵׁ֤ר הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Esther is saying very deferentially that she hopes that the king will think that her suggestion is a good idea and will, therefore, grant her request. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is expressing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “if what I am going to suggest seems like a good idea to you”
755	8:5	r2yy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו & וְ⁠טוֹבָ֥ה אֲנִ֖י בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Esther is saying very deferentially that she hopes that the king is positively disposed towards her, that he thinks well of her, and will, therefore, grant her request. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is expressing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me”
756	8:5	acd9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו	1	Here Esther addresses the king throughout in the third person as a way of showing respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person, as in the UST.
757	8:5	ace0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב	1	This is an idiom that also appears in [1:19](../01/19.md), [3:9](../03/09.md), [5:4](../05/04.md), and [5:8](../05/08.md). A suggested translation in those cases was, “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king.” That was suitable for the deferential tone the speakers were using. But in another place, [7:3](../07/03.md), when Esther was pleading urgently for the survival of her whole people, the suggested alternate translation was, “I hope you will be willing to do what I ask” Here, Esther is also pleading, so you could use that phrase here in your translation as well. Alternate translation: “if what I ask for seems right in the king’s evaluation”
758	8:5	ftc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן	1	This expression also appears many times in the story. It means to gain the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me”
759	8:5	j1r7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו & לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	Here, **face** means the presence of a person. These phrases could mean “as I stand here before you.” But “face” could also be referring to the king himself by naming one part of him. What he thought and felt about Esther’s request would become evident in his face first, so it would be an appropriate part of him to use to represent all of him. Alternate translation: “you”
760	8:5	xci7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו	1	Here, **eyes** represent the action of seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and I please you” or “if you are pleased with me”
761	8:5	j1r9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	יִכָּתֵ֞ב לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶת־הַ⁠סְּפָרִ֗ים	1	The first letters that told of the plan to destroy the Jews would not be brought back to Susa physically. Rather, **bring back** is an idiom that means “cancel” or “revoke.” Alternate translation: “make a new law to cancel what Haman decreed”
762	8:5	nbk3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	יִכָּתֵ֞ב לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶת־הַ⁠סְּפָרִ֗ים	1	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “write a new letter” or “make a new law”
763	8:6	j2r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּ֠י	1	Here Esther is giving the reason why she is asking King Ahasuerus to revoke the letters. Alternate translation: “the reason I am asking is that”
764	8:6	udt6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	אֵיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י וְ⁠אֵֽיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י	1	Esther is actually making a statement, but she expresses herself in question form to show how strongly she feels about what she is saying. She does not actually expect the king to tell her how she could bear seeing her people destroyed. Alternate translation: “I cannot bear to see disaster fall on the Jews” or “I cannot endure watching my relatives be killed”
765	8:6	ace1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	אֵיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י וְ⁠אֵֽיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י	1	These two sentences mean basically the same thing. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “I could not bear to see my relatives and my whole people destroyed”
766	8:6	ace2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י	1	Even though it was morally very wrong for Haman to want to destroy Mordecai’s whole people, here the abstract noun **evil** likely means “harm,” as in [7:7](../07/07.md). It means the same thing as “destruction” in the next sentence. Alternate translation: “my people being destroyed”
767	8:6	ace3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	יִמְצָ֣א	1	As in [1:5](../01/05.md), **find** is an idiom that means something exists in a certain place or time, not that people were looking for it and located it. Esther is speaking of the harm that will exist for the Jews if the effect of Haman’s letters is not undone. Alternate translation: “would be destroyed”
768	8:6	ace4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן	1	This abstract noun can be expressed with a verb such as “destroyed.”
769	8:6	ace5			מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י	1	Alternate translation: “my relatives”
770	8:7	j2r7			הִנֵּ֨ה	1	This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.”
771	8:7	ace6			בֵית־הָמָ֜ן נָתַ֣תִּי לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר	1	See the note about this expression in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “I have given Esther all the property that belonged to Haman” or “I have given Esther the household of Haman”
772	8:7	h44h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בֵית־הָמָ֜ן	1	Here, **house** is a metonym meaning the entire household of Haman. Alternate translation: “the household of Haman”
773	8:7	ace7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	וְ⁠אֹת⁠וֹ֙ תָּל֣וּ עַל־הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ	1	You can put this information first because it happened before the king gave Haman’s property to Esther. Alternate translation: “I had my servants impale Haman on a wooden pole” or “I had my servants hang Haman on a gallows”
774	8:7	ace8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ	1	See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow.
775	8:7	j2r9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	שָׁלַ֥ח יָד֖⁠וֹ	1	Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. Alternate translation: “because he plotted to destroy all the Jews”
776	8:8	acf0			וְ֠⁠אַתֶּם	1	Alternate translation: “so this is what you should do”
777	8:8	acf1			כִּתְב֨וּ עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֜ים כַּ⁠טּ֤וֹב בְּ⁠עֵֽינֵי⁠כֶם֙	1	Alternate translation: “I am giving you permission to write other letters to save your people”
778	8:8	j3r1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	כַּ⁠טּ֤וֹב בְּ⁠עֵֽינֵי⁠כֶם֙	1	Here, **eyes** represent the action of seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that Esther and Mordecai have permission to write what they think is best. Alternate translation: “as you think is best” or “what you think is best”
779	8:8	j3mn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בְּ⁠שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	Here, **name** is a metaphor meaning authority. This phrase means Esther and Mordecai have permission to write with the authority of the King Ahasuerus.
780	8:8	acf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	בְּ⁠שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	King Ahasuerus refers to himself in the third person. You can have him say this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I give you permission to write with my own authority”
781	8:8	j3r3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	This is a special ring that could be used to imprint the king’s official seal on a law or decree. Alternate translation: “the ring that has my official seal on it”
782	8:8	acf3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	King Ahasuerus refers to himself in the third person. You can have him say this in the first person. Alternate translation: “the ring that has my official seal on it”
783	8:8	j3r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּֽי	1	Here, King Ahasuerus is expressing the reason why he cannot simply revoke the first letter and also why Esther and Mordecai can write another letter that people must obey. Alternate translation: “you see” or “people will obey your letter because”
784	8:8	acf4			אֵ֥ין לְ⁠הָשִֽׁיב	1	As in verse 5, this expression means “revoke.” Alternate translation: “no one can revoke” or “no one can nullify”
785	8:8	acf5			כְתָ֞ב & אֵ֥ין לְ⁠הָשִֽׁיב	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this first in the verse because it explains why Ahasuerus answers Esther and Mordecai in the way that he does. See the UST.
786	8:8	acf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כְתָ֞ב אֲשֶׁר־נִכְתָּ֣ב בְּ⁠שֵׁם־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ וְ⁠נַחְתּ֛וֹם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֥עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ	1	The king is describing a general situation, but he has Haman’s letter specifically in mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Haman wrote his letter with my authority, and he sealed it with the ring that has my official seal on it. No one can revoke a letter like that” (The story explained in [1:19](../01/19.md) that the king’s laws could not be changed once they had been made and proclaimed.)
787	8:9	acf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ	1	This indicates that what is described in this verse was done because of what the king said in the previous verse. Use a connecting word or phrase to show this in your language.
788	8:9	s4ue		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the king called his scribes”
789	8:9	acf8			וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ	1	If you use an expression such as “called,” make sure your readers will understand that the king likely sent an official to go and bring the scribes back with him. The king did not call out in a loud voice to get them to come.
790	8:9	j4r1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֜י	1	Alternate translation: “in month three”
791	8:9	acf9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֜י	1	It would still be the same year as in [3:7](../03/07.md), the twelfth year that Ahasuerus reigned as king of Persia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the third month of the year”
792	8:9	j356		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths	הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ סִיוָ֗ן	1	**Sivan** is the name of the third month of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “the month of Sivan”
793	8:9	acg1			הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ סִיוָ֗ן	1	The story is being recorded from the perspective of the Persian court, but for the benefit of its intended Jewish audience, the Hebrew name of the month is given. This month overlaps with May and June on a Western calendar.
794	8:9	j4r3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֣ה וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִים֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒	1	Alternation translation: “on day 23” or “on the twenty-third day of the month” The exact date of the letter helps to establish its legal authority. This would be on June 25th of a Western calendar.
795	8:9	sz6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֣ב כְּֽ⁠כָל־אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֣ה מָרְדֳּכַ֣י	1	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and they wrote in a letter everything that Mordecai dictated to them”
796	8:9	acg2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֶל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֡ים	1	It appears from verse 11 that the letter would have been addressed specifically to the Jews in the empire, telling them that the king had authorized them to defend themselves. But copies were also sent to all the royal and provincial officials. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the letter addressed the Jews in the empire, but copies were also sent”
797	8:9	acg3			וְ⁠אֶ֣ל הָ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנִֽים־וְ⁠הַ⁠פַּחוֹת֩ וְ⁠שָׂרֵ֨י הַ⁠מְּדִינ֜וֹת	1	See how you translated these terms in [3:12](../03/12.md), where they were used to describe who received Haman’s letter. These are all people in government positions. The first one is the governor of the province and the other two are rulers under him who govern cities or smaller areas. If your language uses one term for all of these, you could use that with a descriptive phrase such as “to the government leaders of each province and also to the leaders under him.”
798	8:9	acg4			אֲשֶׁ֣ר ׀ מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֗וּשׁ שֶׁ֣בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה	1	This is background information explaining how far this new letter had to be sent. See how you translated this phrase in [1:1](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: “the empire of Ahasuerus had 127 provinces, stretching all the way from India in the east to Ethiopia in the west”
799	8:9	zp4q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	שֶׁ֣בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה	1	Alternate translation: “one hundred and twenty-seven provinces”
800	8:9	j4r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙	1	This expression means “to people in every province.” Alternate translation: “the scribes wrote to the people in each province”
801	8:9	bj5s			כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ	1	Alternate translation: “using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script”
802	8:9	j4r7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם	1	This expression means “every people group.” Alternate translation: “and to each ethnic group”
803	8:9	j4r9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כִּ⁠לְשֹׁנ֑⁠וֹ	1	Here, **tongue** means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “in its own language”
804	8:9	j5r1			וְ⁠אֶ֨ל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֖⁠ם וְ⁠כִ⁠לְשׁוֹנָֽ⁠ם	1	The Jews would have been included among all the people groups in the empire in the phrase “people by people.” So this seems to be saying, “and especially to the Jews.” Verse 11 explains that it was particularly important for the Jews to read the letter because it gave them the right to defend themselves. Alternate translation: “they wrote especially to the Jews in their own script and in their own language”
805	8:10	acg5			וַ⁠יִּכְתֹּ֗ב & וַ⁠יַּחְתֹּ֖ם	1	**He** refers to Mordecai. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use his name here.
806	8:10	ijp2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בְּ⁠שֵׁם֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֹ֔שׁ	1	Here, **name** is a metaphor meaning authority. Alternate translation: “Mordecai wrote with the authority of King Ahasuerus”
807	8:10	jf31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יַּחְתֹּ֖ם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	This means that Mordecai sealed the letters with this ring. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and he sealed the letters with the ring that had the king’s official seal on it”
808	8:10	yt4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בְּ⁠יַד֩ הָ⁠רָצִ֨ים בַּ⁠סּוּסִ֜ים	1	As in [3:13](../03/13.md), **hand** could mean two different things. (1) It could literally mean “hand,” meaning that the runners carried the letters in their hands. (2) It could also be a metaphor for power, control, or authority, meaning that runners were the ones who delivered the letters to all the provinces throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “couriers on horseback delivered the letters”
809	8:10	acg6			רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים בְּנֵ֖י הָֽ⁠רַמָּכִֽים	1	Alternate translation: “They rose fast horses that were used in the king’s service. These horses had been bred in the king’s stables.”
810	8:10	p9uc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בְּנֵ֖י הָֽ⁠רַמָּכִֽים	1	Here, **sons** is a metonym meaning the offspring of royal livestock. Alternate translation: “the offspring of the king’s horses”
811	8:11	j5r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בְּ⁠כָל־עִיר־וָ⁠עִ֗יר	1	This expression means “in each and every city.” It is possibly referring to the entire empire by naming one part of it, its cities. The story says in [9:19](../09/19.md) that not just Jews living in cities but Jews living in rural areas also defended themselves. It is likely that the messengers only published the news in the cities and not the entire countryside, but the news was certainly intended for everyone, not only people living in the cities. Alternate translation: “throughout the empire” or “in each and every city” or “in every single city”
812	8:11	e1mj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לְ⁠הִקָּהֵל֮ וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ⁠ם֒	1	Here, **to stand** is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and fight back instead of running away from an enemy. Alternate translation: “to join together and fight for their lives” or “to join together and fight back”
813	8:11	j5r7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	לְ⁠הַשְׁמִיד֩ וְ⁠לַ⁠הֲרֹ֨ג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֜ד	1	These words mean the same thing and are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction that is being described. See how you translated this in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [7:4](../07/04.md). Alternate translation: “completely destroy” (A “doublet” can involve the use of more than two words.)
814	8:11	acg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כָּל־חֵ֨יל עַ֧ם וּ⁠מְדִינָ֛ה הַ⁠צָּרִ֥ים אֹתָ֖⁠ם	1	**Strength** is a figurative way of referring to an army or to a person carrying weaponry. Alternate translation: “the army of any people or province that attacked them”
815	8:11	acg8			טַ֣ף וְ⁠נָשִׁ֑ים	1	Alternate translation: “they could also kill the wives and children of the armed men”
816	8:11	acg9			וּ⁠שְׁלָלָ֖⁠ם לָ⁠בֽוֹז	1	See how you translated this expression in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “and take everything that belonged to them”
817	8:12	ach0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אֶחָ֔ד	1	This was the day that Haman had set for destroying the Jews in [3:13](../03/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “on the same day that Haman had set for destroying the Jews”
818	8:12	ach1			בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינ֖וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ	1	Alternate translation: “in every province of the kingdom”
819	8:12	j6r3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר	1	Alternate translation: “on day 13” or “on the thirteenth day”
820	8:12	hi2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר	1	Alternate translation: “of month 12” or “of the twelfth month”
821	8:12	ach2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר	1	Implicitly, this means “the twelfth month of that same year.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly.
822	8:12	j6r4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths	הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר	1	This is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md) and [3:13](../03/13.md).
823	8:13	j6r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	פַּתְשֶׁ֣גֶן הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב לְ⁠הִנָּ֤תֵֽן דָּת֙	1	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials to proclaim this as a law”
824	8:13	j6r7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה	1	This expression means “in each and every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province”
825	8:13	ach4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	גָּל֖וּי לְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠עַמִּ֑ים	1	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials in every single province to post copies where everyone could see them”
826	8:13	ach5			וְ⁠לִ⁠הְי֨וֹת הַיְּהוּדִ֤ים עֲתִידִים֙ לַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה	1	Alternate translation: “that way the Jews would get ready to do what the letter said when the day came”
827	8:13	qk1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לְ⁠הִנָּקֵ֖ם מֵ⁠אֹיְבֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	This expression, “to take revenge from” another person, means to correct a wrong they have done. In this context, the phrase means to correct the wrong of the original law that gave people permission to kill the Jews. Alternate translation: “and fight back against their enemies”
828	8:14	ach7			הָ⁠רָצִ֞ים רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים	1	See how you translated this in [8:10](../08/10.md). Alternate translation: “messengers riding on fast horses that were used for the king’s business”
829	8:14	ach6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	מְבֹהָלִ֥ים וּ⁠דְחוּפִ֖ים בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ	1	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king commanded the couriers to deliver the letters as quickly as possible”
830	8:14	b69j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	מְבֹהָלִ֥ים וּ⁠דְחוּפִ֖ים	1	These two terms mean almost the same thing and are used together to emphasize the fact that the couriers were told to deliver the letters as quickly as possible. Alternate translation: “they went immediately” or “as quickly as possible”
831	8:14	ach8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	הָ⁠רָצִ֞ים רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים	1	To present the events in chronological order, you can put this after the king’s command, as in the UST.
832	8:14	j6r9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠הַ⁠דָּ֥ת נִתְּנָ֖ה	1	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king’s officials also posted and read copies of the letter”
833	8:15	j7r3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י יָצָ֣א	1	This introduces a new event in the story. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this.
834	8:15	j7r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ	1	Here, **face** represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that Mordecai had been in the presence of King Ahasuerus and was now leaving in order to fulfill his duties as a high official in the Persian government. Alternate translation: “from the palace”
835	8:15	ach9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בִּ⁠לְב֤וּשׁ מַלְכוּת֙ תְּכֵ֣לֶת וָ⁠ח֔וּר וַ⁠עֲטֶ֤רֶת זָהָב֙ גְּדוֹלָ֔ה וְ⁠תַכְרִ֥יךְ בּ֖וּץ וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֑ן	1	The implication is that the king gave Mordecai these special things to wear to show that he was now his highest officer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. To put these events in chronological order, you could place this information before the report that Mordecai left the king’s presence to fulfill his duties.
836	8:15	aci1			בִּ⁠לְב֤וּשׁ מַלְכוּת֙ תְּכֵ֣לֶת	1	Alternate translation: “a blue and white garment that the king had worn”
837	8:15	aci2			וַ⁠עֲטֶ֤רֶת זָהָב֙ גְּדוֹלָ֔ה	1	Alternate translation: “a large golden crown”
838	8:15	eqc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֣יר שׁוּשָׁ֔ן צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה	1	Here, **the city** represents the people living in it. Alternate translation: “the people of Susa”
839	8:15	i1ec		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word **rejoiced** tells how they cheered. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning by saying something like “shouted joyfully.” Alternate translation: “cheered and were happy”
840	8:15	aci3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה	1	The implication is that the people did this when they saw Mordecai. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly.
841	8:16	q2ru		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	הָֽיְתָ֥ה אוֹרָ֖ה	1	Here, **light** represents happiness. Alternate translation: “the Jews felt happy”
842	8:16	aci4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	הָֽיְתָ֥ה אוֹרָ֖ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֑ה	1	The terms **light** and **joy** refer to the same thing here. They are used together to emphasize the extreme happiness that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “the Jews felt very happy”
843	8:16	j8r1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וְ⁠שָׂשֹׂ֖ן וִ⁠יקָֽר	1	These terms have similar meaning and are used together with the previous doublet to emphasize again the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt.
844	8:16	n94u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וִ⁠יקָֽר	1	Here, **honor** might have two possible meanings. (1) Other people honored the Jews. Alternate translation: “other people honored them” (2) The Jews themselves felt honor instead of shame. Alternate translation: “they felt honored”
845	8:17	k1eh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֨ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֜ה	1	This expression means “each and every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province”
846	8:17	j8r3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֗יר	1	This expression means “each and every city.” Alternate translation: “in every single city”
847	8:17	va7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	מְקוֹם֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙ מַגִּ֔יעַ	1	This expression describes the king’s message as if it were a person that could travel to a particular place. This phrase refers to all the places that received the king’s letter. Alternate translation: “wherever the king’s couriers took his decree” or “wherever the couriers read the letter announcing the king’s decree”
848	8:17	j8r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	שִׂמְחָ֤ה וְ⁠שָׂשׂוֹן֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים	1	The terms **joy** and **rejoicing** have similar meaning and are used together to emphasize the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “the Jews rejoiced greatly”
849	8:17	p89m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב	1	These two terms mean something similar and are used together to emphasize the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “and had festive celebrations”
850	8:17	aci5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב	1	This expression generally means a day of happiness or celebration. Alternate translation: “and a holiday”
851	8:17	aci6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠רַבִּ֞ים מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ מִֽתְיַהֲדִ֔ים	1	The implication is that they did this because they thought that the Jews might attack them when the Jews fought back against their enemies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly.
852	8:17	aci7			וְ⁠רַבִּ֞ים מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ מִֽתְיַהֲדִ֔ים	1	Alternate translation: “many people from the other ethnic groups in the empire”
853	8:17	aci8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙	1	The **peoples of the land** were the non-Jewish people groups within the empire.
854	8:17	r3qf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	Here, **falling** is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “they had become very afraid of the Jews”
855	8:17	aci9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	To present the events in chronological order, you can say this before saying that the people from the other groups became Jews themselves.
856	9:intro	yty1				0	# Esther 9 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Purim\n\nThe events of this chapter were so significant, the Jews celebrated these events every year after this. It is known as “Purim.”\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Ironic Situation\n\nThe day that was supposed to bring great victory to the enemies of the Jews became a day of great victory for the Jews. This is a type of irony.\n\n### Opening Summary\n\nVerse 1 of chapter 9 provides a summary of everything that happens in this chapter. If using an opening summary is not normally used in your language, be sure to mark this as a summary either in the text or in a footnote. An opening summary like this is a characteristic device of Hebrew storytelling. So even though it describes the final outcome, we do not recommend that you move it to the end of the chapter unless it is very confusing to leave it here. To make it clear that verse 1 is only a summary and not the entire story, you could say something like this at the end of the verse: “This is what happened” or “Here are more details about what happened.”
857	9:1	j8r7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ	1	This introduces a new event. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a new event.
858	9:1	acj0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֗ר בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ	1	The implication is that this happened in the twelfth month of the same year that the letters were sent out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the twelfth month of that year, the month of Adar”
859	9:1	j8r9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ	1	Alternate translation: “now in the twelfth month”
860	9:1	t9yc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths	הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֗ר	1	**Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), and [8:12](../08/12.md).
861	9:1	j9r1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ	1	Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the month”
862	9:1	acj1			אֲשֶׁ֨ר & דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠הֵעָשׂ֑וֹת	1	Alternate translation: “what the letters said the king had decreed”
863	9:1	wh56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	אֲשֶׁ֨ר הִגִּ֧יעַ דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠הֵעָשׂ֑וֹת	1	This expression describes the king’s decree as if it had traveled through time (as a person travels through space) and reached this particular day. This phrase means that it was time for people to obey the decree. Alternate translation: “when the time came for people to obey the king’s law and decree” or “when it was the day established in the king’s letters for people to carry out the king’s law”
864	9:1	acj2			בַּ⁠יּ֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֨ר שִׂבְּר֜וּ אֹיְבֵ֤י הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ לִ⁠שְׁל֣וֹט בָּ⁠הֶ֔ם	1	Alternate translation: “the enemies of the Jews had expected to defeat the Jews on that day”
865	9:1	ect2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לִ⁠שְׁל֣וֹט	1	This word usually means “to rule over,” but here it means “to have power over, to be able to destroy.”
866	9:1	lq9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נַהֲפ֣וֹךְ	1	Saying that a situation was turned over is a figurative way of saying that what happened was the opposite of what was expected. Alternate translation: “the situation was reversed” or “the opposite happened”
867	9:1	acj3			ה֔וּא אֲשֶׁ֨ר יִשְׁלְט֧וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֛ים הֵ֖מָּה בְּ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	Alternate translation: “Instead, it was the Jews themselves who destroyed their enemies”
868	9:1	acj4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בְּ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	This is an idiom that describes enemies
869	9:2	tj62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד	1	Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing him. Alternate translation: “to defend themselves” or “to fight”
870	9:2	d44x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	בִּ⁠מְבַקְשֵׁ֖י רָֽעָתָ֑⁠ם	1	Here the abstract noun **evil** likely means “harm,” as in [7:7](../07/07.md) and [8:6](../08/06.md). In this context, the term can be expressed with a verb. Alternate translation: “who were trying to destroy them”
871	9:2	acj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠אִישׁ֙ לֹא־עָמַ֣ד לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם	1	Alternate translation: “no one stood against them” or “no one was able to defeat them”
872	9:2	x8s3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠אִישׁ֙ לֹא־עָמַ֣ד לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם	1	Here, **standing** is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and to fight back instead of running away from an enemy. Alternate translation: “was able to fight back”
873	9:2	j9r3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם	1	Here, **face** stands for the presence of a person, so here it means “when faced with them.” Alternate translation: “against them”
874	9:2	h7jh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	נָפַ֥ל פַּחְדָּ֖⁠ם עַל־כָּל־הָ⁠עַמִּֽים	1	Here, **falling** is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “all the peoples suddenly became very afraid”
875	9:2	acj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	נָפַ֥ל פַּחְדָּ֖⁠ם עַל־כָּל־הָ⁠עַמִּֽים	1	The implication is that as a result, no one helped anyone who attacked the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly.
876	9:3	acj8			שָׂרֵ֨י הַ⁠מְּדִינ֜וֹת וְ⁠הָ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנִ֣ים וְ⁠הַ⁠פַּח֗וֹת	1	See how you translated these terms in [3:12](../03/12.md) and [8:9](../08/09.md). Alternate translation: “the government leaders in each province”
877	9:3	acj9			וְ⁠עֹשֵׂ֤י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	Alternate translation: “anyone the king had trusted with his affairs”
878	9:3	ack0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	מְנַשְּׂאִ֖ים אֶת־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֑ים	1	Here, **lifting up** is a figurative way of saying “helping.” The picture is likely of someone helping a tired or injured person to stand or walk by holding them up. Alternate translation: “helped the Jews”
879	9:3	q2ue		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	Here, **falling** is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of Mordecai”
880	9:4	j9r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּֽי	1	This term introduces the reason why the officials and satraps and governors were becoming afraid of Mordecai.
881	9:4	xd49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	The implication is that this is why all the other officials were afraid of Mordecai. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation, add: “They were afraid of him because”
882	9:4	ack1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	**The palace of the king** is a figurative way of describing the king’s administration by referring to the place where it was headquartered. Alternate translation: “was very important in the king’s government”
883	9:4	ack2			גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	**Great** here is the same term that, as a verb, describes promotion within the king’s service in [3:1](../03/01.md) and [5:11](../05/11.md). Alternate translation: “Mordecai was a very important royal official”
884	9:4	mr66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	וְ⁠שָׁמְע֖⁠וֹ הוֹלֵ֣ךְ בְּ⁠כָל־הַ⁠מְּדִינ֑וֹת	1	Here the story speaks of the news of Mordecai’s greatness as if it were a living thing that could travel throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “throughout the empire, everyone was hearing the news of his greatness”
885	9:4	j9r9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מָרְדֳּכַ֖י הוֹלֵ֥ךְ וְ⁠גָדֽוֹל	1	This expression means that Mordecai continued to become more powerful and influential. Alternate translation: “Mordecai was becoming more famous because the king was giving him more and more power”
886	9:5	ack3			וַ⁠יַּכּ֤וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ בְּ⁠כָל־אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב	1	After the information about Mordecai, the story now returns to tell what happened on the appointed day. You could add a phrase to show this. Alternate translation, add: “on the day when they were allowed to defend themselves”
887	9:5	ack4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וַ⁠יַּכּ֤וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ בְּ⁠כָל־אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב	1	This expression means that the Jews defended themselves against their enemies, even to the point of killing people who attacked them. Alternate translation: “the Jews attacked all of their enemies and killed them with their swords”
888	9:5	j11d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב	1	Swords were not necessarily the only weapons the Jews had and used. The sword is used to represent all of their weaponry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this more general meaning. Alternate translation: “the Jews took up their weapons and used them against their enemies”
889	9:5	j13d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וְ⁠הֶ֖רֶג וְ⁠אַבְדָ֑ן	1	These two words have the same meaning and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they destroyed them completely”
890	9:5	j15d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וַ⁠יַּֽעֲשׂ֥וּ בְ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶ֖ם כִּ⁠רְצוֹנָֽ⁠ם	1	This expression does not mean that the Jews felt pleasure when they killed their enemies. Rather, it means that the Jews were able to defend themselves against their enemies and were not hindered in any way. Alternate translation: “they were able to do everything they wanted to do against their enemies”
891	9:5	ack5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בְ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶ֖ם	1	This is an idiom that describes enemies.
892	9:6	b5ft			וּ⁠בְ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֗ה	1	Alternate translation: “just in Susa, the capital city”
893	9:6	j17d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	הָרְג֤וּ & וְ⁠אַבֵּ֔ד	1	These two words have the same meaning and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “killed”
894	9:6	ha18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	חֲמֵ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת אִֽישׁ	1	Alternate translation: “five hundred men”
895	9:7	ack6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	פַּרְשַׁנְדָּ֛תָא & דַּֽלְפ֖וֹן & אַסְפָּֽתָא	1	The story lists the names of Haman’s sons before explaining that they were his sons and that the Jews killed them. To be clear who these people are, you can add this information from verse 10 explicitly here. Alternate translation, add: “rhe Jews killed the ten sons of their enemy Haman son of Hammedatha. The names of his sons were …”
896	9:7	s6x2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	פַּרְשַׁנְדָּ֛תָא & דַּֽלְפ֖וֹן & אַסְפָּֽתָא	1	These are the names of men.
897	9:8	g6zx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	פּוֹרָ֛תָא & אֲדַלְיָ֖א & אֲרִידָֽתָא	1	These are the names of men.
898	9:9	gj4p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	פַּרְמַ֨שְׁתָּא֙ & אֲרִיסַ֔י & אֲרִדַ֖י & וַיְזָֽתָא	1	These are the names of men.
899	9:10	fsa2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	עֲ֠שֶׂרֶת בְּנֵ֨י	1	Alternate translation: “the 10 sons”
900	9:10	xt5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	צֹרֵ֥ר הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews”
901	9:10	j19d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לֹ֥א שָׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם	1	Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to take something from another person. Alternate translation: “they did not take”
902	9:10	ack7			וּ⁠בַ֨⁠בִּזָּ֔ה	1	Alternate translation: “But … their possessions”
903	9:11	ack8			בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠ה֗וּא	1	Alternate translation: “at the end of that day”
904	9:11	j21d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	בָּ֣א מִסְפַּ֧ר & לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Here the story speaks about the report as if it were a living thing that could come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “one of the king’s servants told the king the number of”
905	9:11	acl0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Here, **face** represents the presence of a person. This phrase likely means that someone came into the king’s presence in order to deliver this report. Alternate translation: “someone came in and reported to the king”
906	9:11	j22d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	מִסְפַּ֧ר הַֽ⁠הֲרוּגִ֛ים	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “how many people the Jews had killed”
907	9:12	j33d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	הָרְגוּ֩ & וְ⁠אַבֵּ֜ד	1	These terms mean the same thing and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “killed”
908	9:12	cz3e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	חֲמֵ֧שׁ מֵא֣וֹת אִ֗ישׁ	1	Alternate translation: “five hundred men”
909	9:12	acl1			וְ⁠אֵת֙	1	Alternate translation: “including”
910	9:12	j5p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	עֲשֶׂ֣רֶת בְּנֵֽי	1	Alternate translation: “10 sons”
911	9:12	vh5l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	בִּ⁠שְׁאָ֛ר מְדִינ֥וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ מֶ֣ה עָשׂ֑וּ	1	The king is making a statement, but he uses a question form to show that he is very convinced that the Jews must have also killed many people in the other provinces. Alternate translation: “what they must have done in the rest of the king’s provinces” or “they must have killed many more in the rest of the king’s provinces”
912	9:12	s3sr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	וּ⁠מַה־שְּׁאֵֽלָתֵ⁠ךְ֙ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֔⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֥⁠ךְ ע֖וֹד וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ	1	These two statements mean basically the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice to show that he is truly disposed to give Esther what she wants. If it would be confusing, you do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation. Alternate translation: “is there anything more that you want? Tell me, and I will do it for you”
913	9:12	n3ua		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֔⁠ךְ & וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ	1	You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. You can also say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “I will do it for you”
914	9:12	ly4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	שְּׁאֵֽלָתֵ⁠ךְ֙ & בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֥⁠ךְ	1	The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “anything more that you want”
915	9:13	acl2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב	1	This is an idiom that has been used many times in the story. Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king”
916	9:13	acl3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	יִנָּתֵ֣ן	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can indicate that Esther is asking the king to do it. Alternate translation: “please allow”
917	9:13	nz41			גַּם־מָחָ֗ר לַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כְּ⁠דָ֣ת הַ⁠יּ֑וֹם	1	Alternate translation: “all the Jews who live in Susa to obey today’s decree tomorrow also” or “to do tomorrow also what was decreed that they should do today”
918	9:13	j43d			בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן	1	Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”
919	9:13	acl4			עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ	1	The request is not for the king to allow the bodies to be impaled (or hanged), but instead, for the king to order this. Alternate translation: “and have the bodies of Haman’s ten sons hanged [or impaled]”
920	9:13	acl5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ	1	The purpose of this would not be to kill the sons, since they are already dead, but to demonstrate publicly that the enemies of the Jews had been completely defeated.
921	9:13	acl6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ	1	It is implicit that since Haman’s sons are already dead, what Esther is actually asking for is for their bodies to be impaled or hanged. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the bodies of Haman’s ten sons”
922	9:13	nr1p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי	1	Alternate translation: “10 sons”
923	9:13	qyu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הָ⁠עֵֽץ	1	See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful.
924	9:14	acl7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ לְ⁠הֵֽעָשׂ֣וֹת כֵּ֔ן	1	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king granted both of Esther’s requests”
925	9:14	acl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠תִּנָּתֵ֥ן דָּ֖ת בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן	1	This phrase, “in Susa,” seems to indicate that this refers to Esther’s first request. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he issued a decree allowing the Jews in Susa to fight against their enemies again the next day”
926	9:14	j47d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠תִּנָּתֵ֥ן דָּ֖ת בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן	1	This can be stated in active form as in the UST.
927	9:14	j49d			בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן	1	Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”
928	9:14	acl9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	תָּלֽוּ	1	This was Esther’s second request. You can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “he ordered his servants to hang [or impale] the bodies of Haman’s ten sons”
929	9:14	j51d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי	1	Alternate translation: “10 sons”
930	9:15	j55d			בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן	1	Alternate translation: “who lived in the capital city of Susa”
931	9:15	acm0			וַ⁠יִּֽקָּהֲל֞וּ	1	Alternate translation: “joined together”
932	9:15	p9gc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙	1	Alternate translation: “on day 14”
933	9:15	j57d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths	לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר	1	**Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), and [9:1](../09/01.md).
934	9:15	j59d			בְ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן	1	Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”
935	9:15	j61d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	שְׁלֹ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת אִ֑ישׁ	1	Alternate translation: “three hundred men”
936	9:15	lp12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וּ⁠בַ֨⁠בִּזָּ֔ה לֹ֥א שָׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם	1	Here, the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to take something from another person. Alternate translation: “they did not take the things that belonged to them”
937	9:16	j65d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	נִקְהֲל֣וּ ׀ וְ⁠עָמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ֗⁠ם	1	Here, **standing** is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and to fight back instead of running away from an enemy. See how you translated this in [8:11](../08/11.md). Alternate translation: “joined together to fight back against their enemies”
938	9:16	acm2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	נִקְהֲל֣וּ ׀ וְ⁠עָמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ֗⁠ם	1	It’s implicit here, and stated explicitly in the next verse, that these other Jews fought their enemies only on the thirteenth day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly here. Alternate translation, add: “on the thirteenth day of the month of Adar”
939	9:16	acm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נ֨וֹחַ֙ מֵ⁠אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם	1	Here, **resting** is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “they had no more trouble from their enemies”
940	9:16	kms1			וְ⁠הָרֹג֙ בְּ⁠שֹׂ֣נְאֵי⁠הֶ֔ם חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֖ים אָ֑לֶף	1	Alternate translation: “and killed 75,000 of them”
941	9:16	i1d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֖ים אָ֑לֶף	1	Alternate translation: “seventy-five thousand”
942	9:16	m2cx			לֹ֥א שָֽׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם	1	Alternate translation: “they did not take the things that belonged to them” or “they did not take the valuable things” or “the did not take their possessions”
943	9:17	ll4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בְּ⁠יוֹם־שְׁלֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר	1	Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day”
944	9:17	j67d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths	לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֑ר	1	**Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), [9:1](../09/01.md), and [9:15](../09/15.md).
945	9:17	acm5			בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠עָשֹׂ֣ה אֹת֔⁠וֹ י֖וֹם מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה	1	Alternate translation: “they devoted the next day, the fourteenth day of the month of Adar, to joyful celebration” or “they feasted joyfully the next day, the fourteenth day of the month of Adar”
946	9:17	kjj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ	1	Alternate translation: “on day 14”
947	9:17	j69d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word **rejoicing** tells how they celebrated. Alternate translation: “joyful celebration”
948	9:17	acm6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה	1	This is a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. The celebrations must have included more than just eating special meals together, but the story uses those meals to refer to the entire celebrations.
949	9:18	w531			וְהַיְּהוּדִ֣ים אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן נִקְהֲלוּ֙	1	Alternate translation: “but the Jews who lived in the capital city of Susa”
950	9:18	acm7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	נִקְהֲלוּ֙	1	The implication is that they did this to fight against their enemies. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who lived in Susa joined together to fight against their enemies”
951	9:18	acm8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בִּ⁠שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could say which month this is. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth and fourteenth days of the month of Adar”
952	9:18	j73d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בִּ⁠שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ	1	Alternate translation: “on day 13”
953	9:18	j75d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	וּ⁠בְ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ	1	Alternate translation: “and on day 14”
954	9:18	acm9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נ֗וֹחַ בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠עָשֹׂ֣ה אֹת֔⁠וֹ י֖וֹם מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה	1	**Resting** is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “they defeated them, and there was no fighting on the fifteenth day. They devoted that day to joyful celebration”
955	9:18	j77d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ	1	Alternate translation: “on day 15”
956	9:18	j79d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה	1	This phrase means the same thing as in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for feasting joyfully”
957	9:19	j81d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	עַל־כֵּ֞ן	1	This term introduces the result of the events that were described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for that reason” or “that is why”
958	9:19	acn0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֣ים הַפְּרָזִ֗ים הַ⁠יֹּשְׁבִים֮ בְּ⁠עָרֵ֣י הַ⁠פְּרָזוֹת֒	1	These two phrases mean similar things. They are used together to make the identification of this group clear. The first phrase means that they lived in rural areas. The second phrase means they lived in settlements that did not have walls around them, that is, in villages. You can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the Jews who live in villages in the countryside”
959	9:19	acn1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֠ת י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ & וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב	1	The implication is that this explanation is being offered for the benefit of city-dwelling Jews who might wonder why rural Jews celebrate this holiday on a different day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation, add: “rather than on the fifteenth day.”
960	9:19	acn2			עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֠ת י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ & וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב	1	Alternate translation: “observe this holiday on the fourteenth day”
961	9:19	j83d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙	1	Alternate translation: “the fourteenth day”
962	9:19	j85d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths	לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר	1	**Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), [9:1](../09/01.md), [9:15](../09/15.md) and [9:17](../09/17.md).
963	9:19	j87d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	שִׂמְחָ֥ה וּ⁠מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה	1	As in verses 17 and 18, this means “by celebrating joyfully”
964	9:19	j89d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב	1	This expression generally means a day of happiness or celebration.
965	9:19	acn3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וּ⁠מִשְׁל֥וֹחַ מָנ֖וֹת אִ֥ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ	1	Giving gifts, in this culture as in many cultures, was a way of acknowledging a special occasion. Alternate translation: “and by giving gifts to one another”
966	9:19	j91d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִ֥ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ	1	Here, **a man** means “a person.” The term **friend** would include family members and neighbors as well as social friends. Alternate translation: “to one another”
967	9:20	acn4			וַ⁠יִּכְתֹּ֣ב & הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים הָ⁠אֵ֑לֶּה	1	Alternate translation: “wrote an account of all of these events”
968	9:20	acn5			כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗ים אֲשֶׁר֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינוֹת֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ	1	Alternate translation: “all the Jews everywhere in the kingdom”
969	9:20	j95d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	הַ⁠קְּרוֹבִ֖ים וְ⁠הָ⁠רְחוֹקִֽים	1	This is a figurative way of referring to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between. This expression means the Jews who lived in or near Susa, those who lived far away, and all Jews in between. Alternate translation: “everywhere they lived”
970	9:21	acn6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לְ⁠קַיֵּם֮ עֲלֵי⁠הֶם֒ לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים	1	Here, **to set up** means to establish, and to **make** a day means to observe it as a holiday. Alternate translation: “to establish … as a holiday”
971	9:21	j97d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙	1	Alternate translation: “the fourteenth day”
972	9:21	j99d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths	לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר	1	**Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), [9:1](../09/01.md), [9:15](../09/15.md), [9:17](../09/17.md), and [9:19](../09/19.md).
973	9:21	j111		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	יוֹם־חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ	1	Alternate translation: “the fifteenth day”
974	9:21	n4v9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בְּ⁠כָל־שָׁנָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׁנָֽה	1	This expression means “every year.” Alternation translation: “each year”
975	9:22	acn7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כַּ⁠יָּמִ֗ים אֲשֶׁר	1	This verse gives the reason for what Mordecai told the Jews to do in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “because those were the days when”
976	9:22	acn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	נָ֨חוּ בָ⁠הֶ֤ם הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ מֵ⁠א֣וֹיְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם	1	As in verses 16, 17, and 18, **resting** here is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “the Jews stopped fighting because they had defeated their enemies”
977	9:22	acn9			וְ⁠הַ⁠חֹ֗דֶשׁ אֲשֶׁר֩	1	Alternate translation: “And that was the month when”
978	9:22	aco1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה וּ⁠מֵ⁠אֵ֖בֶל לְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב	1	These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize how dramatic and wonderful the change was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like “after being very sad, they became very happy.” Alternate translation: “they changed from being very sorrowful and crying to being very joyful and celebrating”
979	9:22	aco3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה וּ⁠מֵ⁠אֵ֖בֶל לְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב	1	It is implicit that the Jews were deeply distressed because they were being threatened with destruction, and they became very happy once they were safe from all their enemies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that here. Alternate translation: “everything had changed for them. They had been deeply distressed because they were threatened with destruction. But they became very happy once they were safe from all their enemies”
980	9:22	nch1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה	1	**Turning** represents changing. Alternate translation: “they changed from being very sad to being joyful”
981	9:22	aco4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה	1	The abstract nouns **sorrow** and **joy** can be expressed with adjectives such as “distressed” and “happy.”
982	9:22	j113		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	לַ⁠עֲשׂ֣וֹת אוֹתָ֗⁠ם יְמֵי֙	1	These are things that Mordecai is telling the Jews to do in his letters. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that here. Alternate translation: “so Mordecai told them to observe those days with”
983	9:22	j115		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	מִשְׁתֶּ֣ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה	1	As in verses 17, 18, and 19, this phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word “rejoicing” tells how the celebrating was to be done. Alternate translation: “joyful celebration” or “feasting joyfully”
984	9:22	aco5			וּ⁠מִשְׁל֤וֹחַ מָנוֹת֙ אִ֣ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵ֔⁠הוּ	1	See how you translated this in verse 19. Review the notes there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “and by giving gifts to one another”
985	9:22	j117		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִ֣ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵ֔⁠הוּ	1	Here, **a man** means “a person.” The term **friend** would include family members and neighbors as well as social friends. Alternate translation: “to one another”
986	9:22	aco6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וּ⁠מַתָּנ֖וֹת לָֽ⁠אֶבְיוֹנִֽים	1	In this culture as in many others, helping the poor was also a way of acknowledging a special occasion. The idea was that no one should miss out on the benefits of the wonderful thing that God had done. Alternate translation: “Mordecai also told them that they should help the poor on those days”
987	9:22	z1vl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠מַתָּנ֖וֹת לָֽ⁠אֶבְיוֹנִֽים	1	This is also something that Mordecai is telling the Jews to do in his letters. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that here. Alternate translation: “Mordecai also told them that they should give gifts to the poor on those days”
988	9:23	aco7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠קִבֵּל֙ & אֲשֶׁר־כָּתַ֥ב מָרְדֳּכַ֖י אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	The implication seems to be that the Jews were glad to do what Mordecai had instructed, because they had already been doing it. You can add a word such as “readily” to indicate this.
989	9:23	aco8			וְ⁠קִבֵּל֙	1	Alternate translation: “agreed”
990	9:23	ib25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	אֲשֶׁר־הֵחֵ֖לּוּ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֑וֹת	1	You can put this information first, to present the events in logical and chronological order. Alternate translation: “the Jews were already celebrating those days that way”
991	9:24	j119		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּי֩	1	This introduces the reason for the events previously described. The story will now summarize everything that happened previously. The Jews were to celebrate because they were able to fight back when Haman plotted to destroy all of them. Alternate translation: “they would celebrate these days to remember”
992	9:24	kqf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כִּי֩	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could say here what this reason is explaining. Alternate translation: “they would establish those days as a holiday in order to remember how”
993	9:24	j125		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	צֹרֵר֙ כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of all the Jews”
994	9:24	aco9			חָשַׁ֥ב עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים לְ⁠אַבְּדָ֑⁠ם	1	Alternate translation: “had tried to carry out a plan that would destroy the Jews”
995	9:24	xz7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠הִפִּ֥יל פּוּר֙ ה֣וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֔ל	1	You can say explicitly why Haman did this. Alternate translation: “he threw Pur (that is, he threw lots) to find out what would be the best day”
996	9:24	bcy2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	פּוּר֙ ה֣וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֔ל	1	As in 3:7, the storyteller is giving both the Persian and the Hebrew name because this is the story behind the Festival of Purim, which takes its name from “Pur.” So this is not repetition for emphasis. You can put in the Persian name and then the name for “lot” in your own language to show that the storyteller is doing this. Alternate translation: “a Pur (that is, a lot)”
997	9:24	j127		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	לְ⁠הֻמָּ֖⁠ם וּֽ⁠לְ⁠אַבְּדָֽ⁠ם	1	The terms **vex** and **destroy** mean basically the same thing. They are used together to emphasize the degree to which Haman’s deadly plans were distressing to the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the terms and express the emphasis with a word like “completely.” Alternate translation: “and completely destroy them”
998	9:25	m8x3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠בְ⁠בֹאָ⁠הּ֮ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒	1	In this summary, many details are communicated implicitly. **She** means Esther. Also, this verse continues the account of what this celebration is commemorating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make these things explicit. Alternate translation: “the celebration also commemorated how Esther dared to come into the king’s presence without being summoned, and she won his favor”
999	9:25	j128		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒	1	Here, **face** is a metonym meaning the presence of a person. This phrase means that Esther came into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “into the king’s presence” or “before the king”
1000	9:25	acp1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אָמַ֣ר עִם־הַ⁠סֵּ֔פֶר	1	Once again, there is much information that is implicit here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “the king gave Mordecai the authority to send a letter throughout the empire saying that the Jews could defend themselves against their enemies”
1001	9:25	y57b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	יָשׁ֞וּב מַחֲשַׁבְתּ֧⁠וֹ הָ⁠רָעָ֛ה אֲשֶׁר־חָשַׁ֥ב עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עַל־רֹאשׁ֑⁠וֹ	1	**His**, **he**, and **him** in this sentence refer to Haman. **Return on his head** is an idiom that means that what a person was planning to do to someone else happened to that person instead. Use an idiom with that meaning in your language. Alternate translation: “the wicked plan that Haman developed against the Jews will be done to him”
1002	9:25	acp2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	וְ⁠תָל֥וּ אֹת֛⁠וֹ וְ⁠אֶת־בָּנָ֖י⁠ו עַל־הָ⁠עֵֽץ	1	The letter itself did not say this. The story is summarizing the events in compressed form. It is speaking of the letter as if it were a person who could take action and give commands like this, but it was the king who gave the command. Alternate translation: “the king also ordered his servants to hang [or impale] Haman on a wooden pole [or hang Haman on a gallows]. When the Jews in Susa killed his ten sons, the king had their bodies hanged [or impaled] as well”
1003	9:25	j129		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הָ⁠עֵֽץ	1	See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful.
1004	9:26	j131		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	עַל־כֵּ֡ן	1	This introduces the reason why the Jews gave the name “Purim” to this celebration. Alternate translation: “for that reason” or “that is why”
1005	9:26	acp3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	קָֽרְאוּ֩ לַ⁠יָּמִ֨ים הָ⁠אֵ֤לֶּה פוּרִים֙	1	**They** means the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jews called these days Purim, like the word Pur”
1006	9:26	c1gi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	פוּרִים֙	1	This is the name of the festival that commemorates the salvation of the Jewish people in ancient Persia from Haman’s plot to destroy and kill all the Jews in a single day.
1007	9:26	buf1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	עַל־שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠פּ֔וּר	1	This is information that the original audience needed to understand how this celebration got its name. You can put this first in the verse because it explains what comes next. Alternate translation: “the Persian word for ‘lot’ is ‘Pur’”
1008	9:26	yq8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠פּ֔וּר	1	It can be stated clearly what “Pur” means. Alternate translation: “the word Pur, which means ‘lot’”
1009	9:26	j133		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	עַל־כֵּ֕ן	1	The story has just given the reason why the holiday is called Purim. Now it is going to give another reason. It will be explaining why the Jews added this holiday to their calendar, in addition to the festivals that were commanded in the Law of Moses. The next verse describes them adding the holiday. This verse gives the reasons why they did that. Alternate translation: “because”
1010	9:26	acp4			עַל־כָּל־דִּבְרֵ֖י הָ⁠אִגֶּ֣רֶת הַ⁠זֹּ֑את	1	This is a reference to the letter that Mordecai wrote, as described in verses 20–22. Alternate translation: “because Mordecai wrote to them to tell them to observe this holiday”
1011	9:26	acp5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize what a vivid experience it was to live through the events that this story describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases and express the emphasis with a word like “amazing.” Alternate translation: “the amazing things that had happened to them”
1012	9:26	acp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	These phrases say generally “this” and “what,” but they are referring to the specific events the story has related. If it would be helpful in your language, you could describe these things specifically. Alternate translation: “because the Jews had been able to destroy the enemies who had wanted to destroy them”
1013	9:26	acp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	You can put this first, before the information about Mordecai’s letter, because it happened first. You can say “then” when you tell about the letter.
1014	9:26	j135		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	This expression means “what had happened to them.”
1015	9:27	acp8			קִיְּמ֣וּ וְקִבְּל֣וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֩ ׀ עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֨ם ׀ וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֜⁠ם וְ⁠עַ֨ל כָּל־הַ⁠נִּלְוִ֤ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶם֙ & לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֣ת שְׁנֵ֤י הַ⁠יָּמִים֙ הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה	1	Alternate translation: “the Jews said that they would tell their descendants and those people who became Jews to be certain to celebrate this festival”
1016	9:27	acp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	קִיְּמ֣וּ וְקִבְּל֣וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֩	1	“Set up” and “accepted” mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews definitely agreed to do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these words. Alternate translation: “agreed to establish”
1017	9:27	j137		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֜⁠ם	1	As in [6:13](../06/13.md), **seed** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants”
1018	9:27	j141		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲב֔וֹר	1	This expression means that the Jews would never stop celebrating the feast of Purim every year. you could put this last since it applies to the whole verse. Alternate translation: “always” or “forever”
1019	9:27	acq0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֣ת שְׁנֵ֤י הַ⁠יָּמִים֙ הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה	1	To present things in chronological order, you can put this before the reference to Jewish descendants and converts to Judaism. Alternate translation: “to establish those two days as holidays and to observe them”
1020	9:27	acq1			כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֖⁠ם	1	Alternate translation: “in the way that Mordecai had told them to do in the letter”
1021	9:27	acq2			וְ⁠כִ⁠זְמַנָּ֑⁠ם	1	This means the fourteenth and fifteenth days of the month of Adar, as specified in [9:21](../09/21.md). Alternate translation: “on those exact days of the month of Adar”
1022	9:27	j143		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בְּ⁠כָל־שָׁנָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׁנָֽה	1	This expression means “each and every year.” Alternate translation: “every single year”
1023	9:28	acq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים	1	This gives the result of the reasons described in verses 26 and 27. Alternate translation: “therefore” or “that is why”
1024	9:28	acq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים	1	**Remembered** and **made** mean basically the same thing here. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews have been faithful in doing this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the general meaning by saying something like “So the Jews have celebrated these days.” Alternate translation: “therefore they said that they would remember and celebrate on those two days”
1025	9:28	hc8s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים	1	This expression uses two passive forms, but you could say the same thing using active forms. Alternate translation: “so the Jews have celebrated and observed these days”
1026	9:28	j145		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בְּ⁠כָל־דּ֣וֹר וָ⁠ד֗וֹר	1	This expression means “in each and every generation.” Alternate translation: “in every single generation”
1027	9:28	j147		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מִשְׁפָּחָה֙ וּ⁠מִשְׁפָּחָ֔ה	1	This expression means “every family.” Alternate translation: “every Jewish family”
1028	9:28	acq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	מְדִינָ֥ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֖ה וְ⁠עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֑יר	1	This could be a figure of speech that refers to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between those parts. Generally speaking, a province would be the largest division of the empire that would identify a person’s location, and a city would be the smallest. Particularly, since the Jews would continue to celebrate Purim after the Persian empire and its provinces no longer exist, you might choose to express the meaning of this figure of speech in a more general way. Alternate translation: “everywhere they have lived”
1029	9:28	j149		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מְדִינָ֥ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֖ה	1	This expression means “every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province”
1030	9:28	j151		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֑יר	1	This expression means “every city.” Alternate translation: “in every single city”
1031	9:28	acq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	וִ⁠ימֵ֞י הַ⁠פּוּרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה לֹ֤א יַֽעַבְרוּ֙ מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם	1	As in verse 27, this expression means that the Jews will never stop celebrating the feast of Purim. You can say this positively. Alternate translation: “will always observe the Festival of Purim faithfully”
1032	9:28	m5o8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	וִ⁠ימֵ֞י הַ⁠פּוּרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה לֹ֤א יַֽעַבְרוּ֙ מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם	1	These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews will definitely not stop celebrating Purim each year. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases and express the emphasis with a word like “definitely” or “certainly” or “always.” Alternate translation: “the Jews and their descendants will certainly always continue to celebrate this festival of Purim”
1033	9:28	acq7			מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים	1	Alternate translation: “within the Jewish community”
1034	9:28	i2qk			וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף	1	Alternate translation: “will always observe”
1035	9:28	j155		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם	1	As in verse 27, **seed** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants”
1036	9:29	je8e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	בַת־אֲבִיחַ֛יִל	1	This information reminds the reader who Esther was.
1037	9:29	cm8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֲבִיחַ֛יִל	1	This man was Esther’s father and Mordecai’s uncle. See how you translated his name in [2:15](../02/15.md).
1038	9:29	oc4c			וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֥י	1	Since the Hebrew verb wrote is feminine singular, it means that the letter was from Esther. The mention of **Mordecai** here probably means that Mordecai helped her to write the letter. Alternate translation: “with Mordecai”
1039	9:29	acq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖י	1	This phrase gives information about Mordecai to remind the reader.
1040	9:29	acq9			וַ֠⁠תִּכְתֹּב & אֶת־כָּל־תֹּ֑קֶף	1	Alternate translation: “using her royal authority” or “using the authority that she had as queen”
1041	9:29	ku7d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	לְ⁠קַיֵּ֗ם אֵ֣ת אִגֶּ֧רֶת הַ⁠פּוּרִ֛ים הַ⁠זֹּ֖את הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית	1	**This second letter of Purim** could refer to: (1) this letter that Esther is writing, which is the second letter that the Jews will receive about the festival of Purim. Alternate translation: “an additional letter about Purim with her authority” or (2) the second letter that Mordecai wrote (See: verses 20–22), creating the festival of Purim. Alternate translation: “to confirm what Mordecai had written about Purim in his second letter” In either case, this letter from Esther is to add her royal authority to what Mordecai had already written.
1042	9:30	acr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	וַ⁠יִּשְׁלַ֨ח סְפָרִ֜ים	1	While this says “**he**,” in context it refers to the letter that Esther wrote with Mordecai’s help. Alternate translation: “they sent copies of this second letter” or “Mordecai ordered messengers to take copies of the letter”
1043	9:30	acr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	אֶל־כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗ים אֶל־שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה מַלְכ֖וּת אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ	1	These three phrases all mean the same thing. The repetition emphasizes that Esther and Mordecai sent this second letter out comprehensively throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “to all the Jews throughout the entire empire of Ahasuerus”
1044	9:30	acr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה	1	The letter was not sent to the provinces as geographical territories, but to the Jews who lived in them. The Jews are being described by something associated with them, the places where they lived.
1045	9:30	u389		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה	1	Alternate translation: “one hundred and twenty-seven provinces”
1046	9:30	iaf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	דִּבְרֵ֥י שָׁל֖וֹם וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת	1	The abstract nouns **peace** and **truth** can be expressed in other ways. Alternate translation: “encouraging the Jews that they are now safe and can live peacefully”
1047	9:30	mpse			דִּבְרֵ֥י שָׁל֖וֹם וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת	1	The Hebrew word translated as **truth** here also refers to things that are “sure” or “secure.” When “peace” and “truth” are paired together, they can refer to a peaceful, stable political environment, as in 2 Kings 20:19 and Jeremiah 33:6. Alternate translation: “with a message that assured them of their peaceful and stable situation”
1048	9:31	acr4			לְ⁠קַיֵּ֡ם אֵת־יְמֵי֩ הַ⁠פֻּרִ֨ים הָ⁠אֵ֜לֶּה בִּ⁠זְמַנֵּי⁠הֶ֗ם כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁר֩ קִיַּ֨ם עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֜ם מָרְדֳּכַ֤י הַ⁠יְּהוּדִי֙ וְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה	1	Alternate translation: “in this second letter, Mordecai the Jew and Queen Esther confirmed that Purim should be celebrated on the fourteenth and fifteenth days of the month of Adar”
1049	9:31	rgr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	הַ⁠יְּהוּדִי֙	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai.
1050	9:31	acr5			וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר קִיְּמ֥וּ עַל־נַפְשָׁ֖⁠ם וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֑⁠ם דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠צֹּמ֖וֹת וְ⁠זַעֲקָתָֽ⁠ם	1	This is referring to background information that the original audience would have known. They would have known what the fasting was about. It could be either: (1) fasting as a part of Purim. We know that some Jews fasted on the 13th day of the month of Adar to commemorate the day that Haman intended to destroy them, or (2) other times of fasting. Ever since the destruction of Jerusalem, the Jews had been fasting and mourning in the fifth month of the year to show their sorrow over what had happened. (The story refers to the Babylonian conquest of Jerusalem in [2:6](../02/06.md).) You could put this information in a footnote if it would help your readers to understand this.
1051	9:31	rl2s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֑⁠ם	1	Here, **seed** is a metaphor meaning the offspring or descendants of the Jews. Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring”
1052	9:32	acr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִכְתָּ֖ב בַּ⁠סֵּֽפֶר	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the royal scribes made an official record of it”
1053	10:intro	h4m4				0	# Esther 10 General Notes\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Mordecai’s new position\n\nThrough the power of Yahweh, Mordecai was given a new position in the Persian Empire. Mordecai was now the second in command in the kingdom of Persia and he used his position to help other Jews.
1054	10:1	j157		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וַ⁠יָּשֶׂם֩ הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֧וֹשׁ	1	This introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural way to introduce a new event in your language.
1055	10:1	b5ht			וַ⁠יָּשֶׂם֩ & מַ֛ס	1	Alternate translation: “Then … levied a tax”
1056	10:1	acr8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	עַל־הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם	1	The purpose of this chapter is to describe the greatness of Mordecai. It does that by showing that he was second in command to a very powerful emperor. Referring to both the land and the sea is a way to include everything that lives in a very large area of the earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the general meaning by saying something like “everyone throughout his empire.” Alternate translation: “on all the people in the empire … even the people who lived on the islands in the Mediterranean Sea” or “on everyone throughout the land and even the far-away islands”
1057	10:1	twn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם	1	The phrase **the islands of the sea** likely refers to the fact that the Persian kings had conquered territories reaching all the way to the Mediterranean Sea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which reached all the way to the Mediterranean Sea.”
1058	10:1	acr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	עַל־הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם	1	These geographic features were not expected to pay the tax. The land and coastlands represent the people living there. The story is describing those people by reference to something associated with them, the places where they live.
1059	10:2	acs1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וְ⁠כָל־מַעֲשֵׂ֤ה תָקְפּ⁠וֹ֙ וּ⁠גְב֣וּרָת֔⁠וֹ	1	**Power** and **might** mean essentially the same thing. They are used together to emphasize how powerful King Ahasuerus was. If it is more natural in your language, you can use one word with that meaning, with another word that gives it emphasis. Alternate translation: “all that he achieved because of how very powerful he was” or “all the great things that he did because of his great power”
1060	10:2	p98n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	תָקְפּ⁠וֹ֙ וּ⁠גְב֣וּרָת֔⁠וֹ	1	The abstract nouns **power** and **might** can be translated with an adjective. See the UST.
1061	10:2	k7tc			וּ⁠פָרָשַׁת֙	1	Alternate translation: “They also wrote a full account”
1062	10:2	acs2			גְּדֻלַּ֣ת מָרְדֳּכַ֔י	1	Alternate translation: “of how important Mordecai was” or “of how the king had honored Mordecai for the great things he had done”
1063	10:2	acs3			גִּדְּל֖⁠וֹ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:1 and 5:11. Alternate translation: “had promoted him”
1064	10:2	acs4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים עַל־סֵ֨פֶר֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים לְ⁠מַלְכֵ֖י מָדַ֥י וּ⁠פָרָֽס	1	This is actually a statement. The question form is used to emphasize the certainty of the statement. If questions are not used this way in your language, then use a statement instead, as in the UST.
1065	10:2	acs5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “The king’s scribes made a record …”
1066	10:2	acs6			הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים	1	Because it comes first logically, you can put this first in the verse, if it would be helpful in your language.
1067	10:2	acs7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	סֵ֨פֶר֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים לְ⁠מַלְכֵ֖י מָדַ֥י וּ⁠פָרָֽס	1	See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “the royal record books of Media and Persia”
1068	10:3	j159		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּ֣י	1	This word indicates that this verse will give the reason why the scribes made a record about Mordecai.
1069	10:3	acs8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗י	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai.
1070	10:3	acs9			מִשְׁנֶה֙ לַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ	1	Alternate translation: “was the second most important person after King Ahasuerus himself”
1071	10:3	act0			וְ⁠גָדוֹל֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים	1	Alternate translation: “and a great leader of the Jews”
1072	10:3	iui7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	אֶחָ֑י⁠ו	1	Here, **brothers** is a figurative way of describing fellow members of the same people group. Alternate translation: “fellow Jews”
1073	10:3	act2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ	1	These two phrases basically mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how hard Mordecai worked for the good of his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like, “He worked hard so his people and their descendants would prosper.”
1074	10:3	act3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ	1	The abstract nouns **good** and **peace** refer in this context to prosperity and security. You could translate these ideas with verbs, for example, you could say, “He worked hard to make sure that his people would prosper and their descendants would be secure.”
1075	10:3	wte9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ	1	**Seeking** is a figurative way to describe actively trying to do something or work hard for something.
1076	10:3	s8f8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ	1	**Speaking peace** is a figurative way of describing actions that benefit the general welfare of others.
1077	10:3	j161		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ	1	As in verses 27 and 28, **seed** means “descendants.” **seed** means “descendants.” Even if you combine the two parallel phrases, you can still convey the idea of “down through the generations” with a word such as “always.” Alternate translation: “to all of their descendants”